+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer...

Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer...

Date post: 03-Aug-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 3 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
217
Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011
Transcript
Page 1: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C

& CL-S631

Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer

JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011

Page 2: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 ii

Copyright © 2010 by CITIZEN SYSTEMS JAPAN CO., LTD.

Page 3: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

iii CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLE

CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING

CHAPTER 5 PARTS LISTS

CHAPTER 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

APPENDICES

Page 4: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 iv

Safety Precautions To prevent personal injury or property damage, the following shall be strictly observed. The degree of possible injury and damage due to incorrect use/maintenance or improperly following instructions is described below.

Indicates a situation which, if not observed and handled properly, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a situation which, if not observed and handled properly, could result in injury or property damage.

: This is a mark to call attention to the reader.

- Before starting disassembly/reassembly or mechanical adjustment, be sure to disconnect the power cord from the power source.

- Do not replace a fuse with the power switch turned on. - When replacing a fuse, use the same rating and type since it is provided to prevent

fire and damage to the “Unit, Power Supply”.

- Do not disassemble/reassemble or adjust the machine, if it functions properly. Particularly, do not loosen screws on any component, unless necessary. - After completing an inspection and before turning on the power, be sure to check that

there is no abnormality. - Never try to print without media. - Check that the media is properly set. - Do not lay anything on the cover or lean against it during maintenance or while the

printer is in operation. - During maintenance, be careful not to leave parts or screws unattached or loose

inside the printer. - When handling a printed circuit board, do not use gloves, etc., which can easily

cause static electricity. Since ICs, such as CPU, RAM and ROM, might be destroyed by static electricity, do not touch lead wires or windows unnecessarily.

- Do not put the printed circuit boards directly on the printer or on the floor. - When disassembling or reassembling, check wires for any damage and do not pinch

or damage them. Also, run wires as they were.

Warning

Caution

Warning

Caution

Page 5: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS

Page 6: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1-2

CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1-1. General Specifications ..................................................................................................1-3 1-2. Printable Area ...............................................................................................................1-8 1-3. Printing Position Accuracy.............................................................................................1-9 1-4. Adjustable Sensors .......................................................................................................1-10

Page 7: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-1. General Specifications

1-3 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

1-1. General Specifications

Printing Printing method Thermal transfer/Direct thermal

Main scanning line density: 203 dots/inch (8 dots/mm) (CL-S621/S621C) 300 dots/inch (11.8 dots/mm) (CL-S631) Sub-scanning line density: 203 dots/inch (8 dots/mm) (CL-S621/S621C) 300 dots/inch (11.8 dots/mm) (CL-S631)

Resolution

Head 864 dots (effective dots: 832 dots) (CL-S621/S621C) Head 1275 dots (effective dots: 1240 dots) (CL-S631)

Max. print width 104 mm (CL-S621/S621C) 105 mm (CL-S631)

4.1 inch

Max. print length 812.8 mm 32 inch Print density Print density is adjustable with software Printing speed setting [For CL-S621/S621C]

6, 5, 4, 3 or 2 inches per second (Direct thermal) 4, 3 or 2 inches per second (Thermal transfer) • 4, 3 or 2 inches per second when the optional peeler is used. [For CL-S631] 4, 3 or 2 inches per second

Print mode Batch mode Normal printing (single or multiple sheets) Tear off mode Feeds back media to the tear-off position after printing is completed. Cut mode *1 Prints while cutting at designated sheet units.

The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available. • Back feed • Cut through (Cut through refers to stopping present printing to cut the previous label when it reaches the cut position. After cutting, printing restarts but a gap may be created at the seam of the printing at this time.)

Peel mode*1 Peels labels from the liners after printing them. Media Types of media Roll, fanfold

(continuous media, die-cuts, continuous tags, paper or tickets) Recommended media Thermal transfer: label media (RPR-W Ricoh)

Direct thermal media: label media (150LA-1 Ricoh), tag media (TB2E0V, Mitsubishi Paper)

Max. media width 118.0 mm 4.65" Min. media width 19.5 mm 0.77" Min. label width 19.5 mm 0.77"

*1: Options can be separately purchased.

Page 8: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-1. General Specifications

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1-4

Media (continued) Min. label pitch*2 6.35 mm 0.25" Max. media thickness 0.254 mm 0.01" Max. media length 812.8 mm 32" Min. media length 6.35 mm 0.25" Min. media thickness 0.0635 mm 0.0025"

Max. external diameter: 127mm 5" On-board roll media diameter Media core: 25.4 to 76mm 1 to 3" Ribbon Recommended ribbon B110A Ricoh Max. ribbon width 114.0 mm 4.50" Min. ribbon width 25.4 mm 1.00" Max. ribbon length 360.0 m 1,181 ft Max. roll diameter 74.0 mm 2.90" Inner diameter of the paper tube

25.4 ± 0.25 mm 1.00 ± 0.01"

Ribbon end detection Ribbon out detection by a tension sensor Bar code

For Datamax® emulation*3 One-dimension • Code 3 of 9 • UPC-A • UPC-E • EAN-13 (JAN-13)

• EAN-8 (JAN-8) • Interleaved 2 of 5 • Code 128 • HIBC (Modulus 43-used code 3 of 9) • Codabar (NW-7) • Int 2 of 5 (Modulus 10-used Interleaved 2 of 5) • Plessey • Case Code • UPC 2DIG ADD • UPC 5DIG ADD • Code 93 • Telepen • ZIP • UCC/EAN 128 • UCC/EAN128 (for K-MART) • UCC/EAN128 Random Weight • FIM

Two-dimension • UPS Maxi Code • PDF-417 • Data Matrix • QR Code • Aztec • RSS

For Zebra® emulation*4 One-dimension • Code 11 • Interleaved 2 of 5 • Code 39 • EAN-8 • UPC-E

• Code 93 • Code 128 • EAN-13 • Industrial 2 of 5 • Standard 2 of 5 • ANSI CODABAR • LOGMARS • MSI • Plessey • UPC/EAN Extensions • UPC-A • POSTNET • Planet

Two-dimension • Code 49 • PDF-417 • CODA BLOCK • UPS Maxi Code • Micro PDF-417 • Data Matrix • QR Code • RSS • TLC39

*2: When a media pitch of less than 1" is used, set the "Small Media Adjustment" setting in the "Page Setup" menu to "ON".

*3: Datamax® is a registered trademark of Datamax Bar Code Products Corporation. *4: Zebra® is a registered trade mark of Zebra Technologies Corporation.

Page 9: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-1. General Specifications

1-5 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Font

For Datamax® emulation*3 1. Seven kinds of fixed pitch font

Overseas, English fonts and European fonts 2. OCR fonts OCR-A*5, OCR-B*5 3. Proportional fonts CG Triumvirate smooth font CG Triumvirate Bold smooth font (6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48 points: CL-S621/S621C) (4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 18, 24, 30, 36, 48 points: CL-S631) • Character set: Conforms with code page 850 standards 4. TrueTypeTM rasterizer *6

5. Chinese fonts (For CL-S621C) GB18030-2000, 15x16 dots, 24x24 dots

For Zebra® emulation*4

1. Five kinds of fixed pitch font Overseas, English fonts and European fonts 2. OCR fonts OCR-A*5, OCR-B*5 3. Proportional font CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold 4. True type™ rasterizer*6

Symbol set PC866U Ukraina, PC Cyrillic, ISO 60 Danish/Norwegian, DeskTop,

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1, ISO 8859/2 Latin 2, ISO 8859/9 Latin 5, ISO 8859/10 Latin 6, ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek, ISO 8859/15 Latin 9, ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic, ISO 69: French, ISO 21: German, ISO 15: Italian, Legal, Math-8, Macintosh, Math, PC-858 Multilingual, Microsoft Publishing, PC-8, Code Page 437, PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N, PC-852 Latin 2, PC-851 Latin/Greek, PC-862 Latin/Hebrew, Pi Font, PC-850 Multilingual, PC-864 Latin/Arabic, PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T, PC-1004, PC-775 Baltic, Non-UGL, Generic Pi Font, Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO 17: Spanish, ISO 11: Swedish, Symbol, PS Text, ISO 4: United Kingdom, ISO 6: ASCII, Ventura International, Ventura Math, Ventura US, Windows 3.1 Latin 1, Wingdings, Windows 3.1 Latin 2, Windows 3.1 Baltic (Latv, Lith), Windows 3.0 Latin 1, Windows Latin/Cyrillic, Windows 3.1 Latin 5

*5: The OCR font may have a low recognition rate according to the reader. *6: It is equipped with UFSTTM and TrueTypeTM rasterizer that are licensed from Agfa Corporation. TrueTypeTM is a trademark of Apple Computer. UFSTTM is a trademark of Agfa Corporation.

Page 10: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-1. General Specifications

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1-6

Control language Conforms to Datamax® programming language*3 and Zebra®

programming language*4 Outline of electronic devices CPU 32-bit RISC CPU ROM Standard equipment: FLASH ROM 4MByte (User area: 1MByte)

For CL-S621C and CL-S621 (Korea version): FLASH ROM 12MByte (User area: 4MByte)

RAM [For Datamax® emulation] Standard equipment: SDRAM 16MByte (User area: 1MByte) For CL-S621C and CL-S621 (Korea version): SDRAM 16MByte (User area: 4MByte) [For Zebra® emulation] Standard equipment: SDRAM 16MByte (User area: 4MByte)

Media detection sensors Transparent sensor Detects media gap between labels, notches on tags, and media out Reflective sensor Detects reflective mark on back of media and media out Label peeling sensor *1 Communication interfaces Serial 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps USB FULL Speed USB1.1 Communication interface options Parallel IEEE1284 (Compatible, Nibble, ECP mode) Network Ethernet interface Indications and switches

LED POWER, PRINT, CONDITION, ERROR Buzzer Alarms, errors, etc. Operating panel keys PAUSE, FEED, STOP, MODE/REPEAT Head-up detection sensor

Detects head open.

Power switch Turns power on and off. Power supply

120V (-10%+6%), 2.5A, 60Hz (U.S.A., Canada) 120V version UL60950-1, CSA No. 950, FCC Part 15 Subpart B (Class A) 220V-240V (-10%+6%), 1.2A, 50/60Hz (Europe) 220V version EN60950-1, EN55022 (Class A), EN55024, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3

Power consumption (max. value) 120V version 64W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 10W (standby) (CL-S621)

66W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 10W (standby) (CL-S631) 220V version 64W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 10W (standby)

(CL-S621/S621C) 67W (operating at 12.5% printing duty), 10W (standby) (CL-S631)

Page 11: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-1. General Specifications

1-7 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Others Environment Operating temperature conditions:

Operating temp. 0 to 40°C, humidity 30 to 80%, condensation free (Conditions: ventilation, and natural convection)

Storage temperature conditions Temp. -20 to 60°C, humidity 5 to 85% (Conditions: ventilation, and natural convection)

[Operating and printing assurance condition] [Storage assurance condition]

External dimensions Approx. 231 (W) X 289 (D) X 263 (H) mm 9.1 (W) X 11.4 (D) X 10.3 (H)"

Weight Approx. 4.9 kg (10.8 lb.) Accessories Test label media, Test ribbon, CD-ROM (User's Manual), Quick start

guide, Head cleaner, Power cord, Media holder bar and Media holder guide, Ribbon holder, Paper core

Option Auto-cutter unit, Peeler unit, Parallel I/F board, Ethernet I/F board

-20 60

5

85

Hum

idity

%

Temperature °C Operating assurance temperature Printing assurance temperature

0 5 35 40

30

40

80

Hum

idity

%

Temperature °CStorage assurance temperature

Page 12: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-2. Printable Area

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1-8

1-2. Printable Area The printable area of the printer is as follows: When media is set to the printer, it must be aligned with the media guide at the left of the printing mechanism. Though the available maximum media width is 118 mm (4.65"), there are unprintable areas on both sides: 2.5 mm (0.10") width is on the left side and 11.5 mm (0.45") (for CL-S621/S621C)/ 10.5 mm (0.41”) (for CL-S631) width on the right side. The left side unprintable area applies for any size media.

MODEL H R

CL-S621/S621C 104.0 mm

(4.09”) 11.5 mm (0.45”)

CL-S631 105.0 mm

(4.13”) 10.5 mm (0.41”)

Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65")

H R

Reference end

Unprintable area

Printable area

Media guide

Direction of media feed

2.5 mm (0.10")

Page 13: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-3. Printing Position Accuracy

1-9 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

1-3. Printing Position Accuracy By default, the printing start position is 2.5 mm (0.10") from the left end of the media and 1 mm (0.04") backward the leading edge of the label, U-shaped notch, or black mark. 2.5 mm (0.10") is the necessary value to avoid printing in the unprintable area as mentioned in 1-2 "Printable Area". The printing start position will deviate from the ideal position as follows:

1 ± 2 mm*2

(0.04 ± 0.08")

Reference edge (Paper guide)

Printable area

Direction of media feed

Ideal printing start position

Actual printing start position*1

2.5 ± 1 mm*3 (0.10 ± 0.04")

100 ± 2 mm*4 (39.4 ± 0.08")

Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65")

Unp

rinta

ble

area

2.5 mm (0.10")

*1: Actual printing start position. May deviates from the ideal one in the indicated range. *2: Deviation of vertical positioning when printing position is set to 0. *3: Deviation of horizontal positioning when printing position is set to 0. *4: Deviation of vertical printing position when 100 mm is specified from the printing start

position.

1 m

m (0

.04"

)

Unp

rinta

ble

area

Page 14: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

1-4. Adjustable Sensors

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1-10

1-4. Adjustable Sensors There are two media sensors; the upper sensor (transparent sensor) and the bottom sensor (reflective sensor). The upper sensor is used to detect the labels on the liner or the U-shaped notches of tag. The bottom sensor is used to detect the black marks on tag. Also, both sensors are used to detect media end. The mechanical adjustable range of both sensors is equal and they are adjustable independently. When both sensors are moved to the left end or the right end (center of the printing mechanism), both sensors coincide for detecting notch or label. For details about the media sensors, refer to “2-1-3 Label/Tag Detection Mechanism".

MODEL H R

CL-S621/S621C 104.0 mm

(4.09”) 11.5 mm (0.45”)

CL-S631 105.0 mm

(4.13”) 10.5 mm (0.41”)

Maximum media width: 118 mm (4.65")

H R

Media guide

Direction of media feed

2.5 mm (0.10")

Unp

rinta

ble

area

Unp

rinta

ble

area

-0.2 to 57.9 mm (-0.01 to 2.28")

Moveable range of sensors

Center

Printable area

Media

Page 15: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 2

OPERATING PRINCIPLES

2-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 16: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism......................................................................................2-4 2-1-1. Locations and Functions of Motors, Sensors and Thermal Head ......................2-4

(1) “Unit, Ribbon” section...............................................................................2-4 (2) Printing section ........................................................................................2-5

2-1-2. Media Feed Mechanism ...................................................................................2-6 2-1-3. Label/Tag Detection Mechanism.......................................................................2-7 2-1-4. Printing and Ribbon Feed Mechanism ..............................................................2-10 2-1-5. Print Head Up/Down Detection Mechanism......................................................2-13 2-1-6. Head Balance Adjustment Mechanism .............................................................2-14 2-1-7. Media Offset Adjustment Mechanism................................................................2-15

2-2. Operation of Control Parts ............................................................................................2-16 2-2-1. Configuration of Printer.....................................................................................2-16

(1) Filter & power supply section ...................................................................2-16 (2) Main PCB.................................................................................................2-16 (3) Operation panel........................................................................................2-16 (4) Thermal print head...................................................................................2-17 (5) Sensors....................................................................................................2-17 (6) Motor........................................................................................................2-17 (7) Serial I/F (RS-232C).................................................................................2-17 (8) USB (Universal Serial Bus) I/F .................................................................2-17 (9) Parallel I/F (IEEE1284) (Option)...............................................................2-17 (10) Ethernet I/F (Option) ...............................................................................2-17

2-2-2. Operation of Control Unit ..................................................................................2-18 (1) Block diagram ..........................................................................................2-18 (2) Memory map ............................................................................................2-20 (3) Sensors....................................................................................................2-21

(3-1) Head up sensor ...........................................................................2-21 (3-2) Transparent sensor and reflective sensor ....................................2-22 (3-3) Tension Sensor F/R.....................................................................2-24 (3-4) Head temperature sensor............................................................2-25 (3-5) PF motor temperature sensor......................................................2-26 (3-6) Ribbon motor temperature sensor ...............................................2-27

(4) Drivers .....................................................................................................2-28 (4-1) PF motor driver............................................................................2-28 (4-2) Ribbon motor driver .....................................................................2-29 (4-3) Head driver..................................................................................2-30 (4-4) Buzzer driver ...............................................................................2-31 (4-5) Fan driver ....................................................................................2-32

(5) Other circuits............................................................................................2-32 (5-1) +3.3V/+1.5V circuit ......................................................................2-32 (5-2) Reset circuit ................................................................................2-33 (5-3) Clock circuit.................................................................................2-33

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-2

Page 17: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

(5-4) Ope-pane circuit ..........................................................................2-34 (5-5) USB I/F control circuit..................................................................2-34

2-3. Operation Panel............................................................................................................2-35 2-3-1. External view ....................................................................................................2-35

(1) Keys.........................................................................................................2-35 (2) LEDs........................................................................................................2-35

2-3-2. Operation using the keys ..................................................................................2-36 (1) Normal operation......................................................................................2-36

(1-1) Sensor adjustment mode.............................................................2-36 (1-2) Menu setting mode......................................................................2-37

(2) Test mode ................................................................................................2-38 (2-1) Self print mode ............................................................................2-38 (2-2) Hex dump mode..........................................................................2-39

(3) Factory/Service mode ..............................................................................2-39 (3-1) General .......................................................................................2-39 (3-2) How to enter the Factory/Service Mode.......................................2-40 (3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table ...............................................2-46

2-4. Interface........................................................................................................................2-51 2-4-1. Serial Interface .................................................................................................2-51

(1) Specifications ...........................................................................................2-51 (2) Signal line and pin assignment.................................................................2-51 (3) Protocol....................................................................................................2-52

2-4-2. USB Interface ...................................................................................................2-53 (1) Specifications ...........................................................................................2-53 (2) Signal line and pin arrangement...............................................................2-53

2-4-3. Parallel Interface (Option).................................................................................2-53 (1) Specifications ...........................................................................................2-53 (2) Signal line and pin assignment.................................................................2-54 (3) Parallel port status signals when an error occurs .....................................2-54 (4) Compatible timing specification ................................................................2-55

2-5. Power Supply................................................................................................................2-57 2-5-1. Block diagram...................................................................................................2-57 2-5-2. Block A (Noise filter circuit and rush current preventing circuit) .........................2-60 2-5-3. Block B (Current smoothing circuit)...................................................................2-60 2-5-4. Block C (Converter and driver circuit) ...............................................................2-60

(1) Converter circuit .......................................................................................2-60 (2) Driver circuit .............................................................................................2-61

2-5-5. Block D (Output circuit).....................................................................................2-62 2-5-6. Block E (Control circuit) ....................................................................................2-62

2-3 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 18: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism This printer is a thermal transfer barcode & printer comprised of the following mechanisms: media feed, ribbon feed, label/tag detection, print head up/down detection, head balance adjustment and media thickness adjustment. This section describes the operation of each of these mechanisms. 2-1-1. Locations and Functions of Motors, Sensors and Thermal Head This printer has the following motors, sensors and thermal head. (1) “Unit, Ribbon” section

Part name Description Ribbon Motor F (Front side)

This motor takes up ribbon. A thermistor is attached to the side surface of this motor to detect the motor temperature.

Ribbon Motor R (Rear side)

This motor gives back tension to ribbon.

Tension Sensor F (Front side)

This sensor is a photointerrupter which detects if appropriate tension is given to the take-up side ribbon or not. It also detects a ribbon-running error.

Tension Sensor R (Rear side)

This sensor is a photointerrupter which detects if appropriate tension is given to the supply side ribbon or not. It also detects the ribbon end status.

Tension Sensor R

Ribbon Motor R

Ribbon Motor F

Tension Sensor F

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-4

Page 19: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-5 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(2) Printing section Part name Description

PF Motor This motor feeds media. A thermistor is attached to the side surface of this motor to detect the motor temperature.

Head Up Sensor This sensor is a photointerrupter to detect the print head position; up or down.

Transparent Sensor (Upper sensor)

This sensor is a photo sensor to detect the labels stuck on liner or U-shaped notches on tag. It also detects the media end.

Reflective Sensor (Bottom sensor)

This sensor is a photo sensor to detect the black marks on tag. It also detects the media end.

Thermal Head It consists of a head driver and thermal elements. Thermal elements are heated to make printing on media. The thermal head incorporates a thermistor to detect the thermal head temperature.

PF motor

Reflective sensor

Transparent sensor

Thermal head Head up sensor and protrusion

Page 20: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-1-2. Media Feed Mechanism The major components of the media feed mechanism are: (a) SA, Motor (b) SA, Platen (c) Gear train By setting the head block to the down position, media is pushed against the “SA, Platen” by the “SA, Head”. As the “SA, Motor” (stepping motor) turns counterclockwise viewing from the right side of the printer, the “SA, Platen” turns counterclockwise via the gear train (“Gear PF1”, “Gear PF2” and “Gear, PF Idle”) and media is fed forward by the friction force produced between the “SA, Platen” and the “SA, Head”. When the “SA, Motor” turns clockwise, media is fed backwards. One step of the “SA, Motor” feeds media by 1/16 mm (0.0025").

������ �� ���

��� ��

������ ������

��� � � � !�"

������ #���� !$"

%��� #& '� !("� � � %�� !("

%��� #&� !(" %��� #&� !("

��$$ �

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-6

Page 21: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-7 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

2-1-3. Label/Tag Detection Mechanism The major components of the label/tag detection mechanism are: (a) Movable reflective sensor (Bottom sensor) (b) Movable transparent sensor (Upper sensor) There are two movable sensors, the reflective sensor (bottom sensor) and the transparent sensor (upper sensor). As shown in the figure blow, the reflective sensor has two LEDs and one phototransistor. The reflective sensor is used to detect black marks at the back of tag. On the other hand, the transparent sensor is a phototransistor that will receive the transparent light from the LEDs through the media. The transparent sensor is used to detect labels on liner or U-shaped notches of tag. Both reflective and transparent sensors are used to detect the media end. Aligning the sensors for label paper or tag with U-shaped notches: For label paper, both reflective and transparent sensors should be manually set at the center of label. For tags with U-shaped notches, both sensors should be manually aligned with the U-shaped notch. In both cases, the arrow mark of the transparent sensor should be aligned with the right side mark of the reflective sensor. Aligning the reflective sensor for tag with black marks: For tag with black marks, the reflective sensor alone should be aligned with the black mark. In this case, the left side mark should be aligned with the black mark.

[For label paper/tag with U-shaped notches]

[For tag with black marks]

Black mark

��������������

���

�����

���������

�����������

������

���������

������

Page 22: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

Detecting labels: (Media Sensor menu: “See Through”) For detecting label, both reflective sensor and transparent sensor are used. Label paper passes between both sensors. The light emitted from the LEDs of the reflective sensor passes through the liner (base part of label paper) where no label is stuck on it, and the light reaches the transparent sensor. Accordingly, the phototransistor of the transparent sensor turns ON. Meanwhile, in the label part, the light is blocked by label and does not reach the phototransistor. So, the phototransistor turns OFF. By sensing the output of the transparent sensor, the CPU on the Main PCB can detect the label leading edge for printing. Detecting U-shaped notches of tag: (Media Sensor menu: “See Through”) For detecting U-shaped notches of tag, both reflective sensor and transparent sensor are used. The U-shaped notches are detected in the same way as the label mentioned above, except that the light is directly falls on the transparent sensor through the notch. Detecting black marks on tag: (Media Sensor menu: “Reflect”) For detecting black marks on tag, only the reflective sensor is used. Light emitted from the LEDs is reflected by the tag (at other than the black mark) and reaches the phototransistor of the reflective sensor. At the black mark, the light is not reflected. The CPU on the Main PCB detects the black mark by sensing the output of the reflective sensor.

Reflective sensorLEDs

Transparent sensor

Media

LEDs

Media

Label

U-shaped notch

Black mark

Tag

Label

Liner

Label gap

Transparent and Reflective sensors Reflective sensor

Media

Sensor to be used

Reflective sensor

Media Sensor menu See Trough Reflect

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-8

Page 23: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-9 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Detecting continuous media: (Media Sensor menu: “None”) For detecting continuous media, only the reflective sensor is used. In this case, only media end is detected by the reflective sensor. LED light amount control: According to the media selected by the Media Sensor menu (“See Through”, “Reflect”, or “None”), the amount of light is well controlled to detect the label/U-shaped notch, black mark, or continuous media. The amount of light is as follows (the largest amount is for “See Through): • Continuous media (None) < Black mark (Reflect) < Label/U-shaped notch (See Through)

Page 24: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-1-4. Printing and Ribbon Feed Mechanism The major components of the printing and ribbon feed mechanism are: (a) SA, Head (d) SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F/R (b) SA, Ribbon Motor F/R (e) SA, Tension Sensor (Front/Rear) (c) Ribbon gear train Ink ribbon is set to the printer using the ribbon holders. Ribbon is supplied from the supply reel and is taken up by the take-up reel with adequate ribbon tension, via the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F/R”. The “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F/R” is always pushed outward by the internal springs, and, when ribbon slacks, it moves outward. When ribbon tightens, it moves inward. (Refer to the figures on the later pages.) The same tension sensor is installed on the take-up and supply sides. The tension sensor on the take-up side is used to detect the position of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”, i.e. the ribbon tension on the take-up side. While, the tension sensor on the supply side is used to detect the position of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R”, i.e. the ribbon tension on the supply side. The tension sensor on the take-up side is also used to detect a ribbon running condition, and that on the supply side is used to detect the ribbon end. On the take-up side, the Ribbon Motor F turns to take up ribbon. On the supply side, the Ribbon Motor R turns to supply ribbon, while applying adequate back tension to ribbon to eliminate ribbon slack. Printing: When printing with ink ribbon, ink on the ribbon is melted by the heated thermal element of the “SA, Head” and is transferred on the media surface. Taking up Ribbon: Ribbon will be taken up on the take-up side as follows: (1) As media is fed, ribbon is also fed by the friction force produced between media and the “SA,

Head”. (2) Ribbon slacks and the tension sensor on the take-up side turns OFF as the “SA, Ribbon

Tension Shaft F” is pushed outward. (3) The Ribbon Motor F starts to turn and ribbon is taken up. (4) Ribbon tightens and the tension sensor on the take-up side turns ON. Then, the Ribbon Motor

F stops. Supplying Ribbon: On the supply side, the Ribbon Motor R turns to supply ribbon, while applying adequate back tension. In the same way as on the take-up side, the tension sensor on the supply side detects the ribbon tension to keep the ribbon tension constant. However, when printing is made and ribbon is fed, the tension sensor on the supply side turns ON since ribbon is tightened at this time.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-10

Page 25: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-11 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Reel Drive Mechanism: Though the ribbon holders are directly installed in the reels, ribbon is connected to the reels via the spring mechanism of the ribbon holders. This means that ribbon is taken up via the spring mechanism when the Ribbon Motor F/R turns. On the take-up side, the Ribbon Motor F turns in the clockwise direction viewing from the right side of the printer, the “Gear 5F, Ribbon” (take-up reel) turns in the counterclockwise direction via the Ribbon Gears 1, 2, 3 and 4, and ribbon is taken up. On the supply side, the rotational direction of the Ribbon Motor R differs depending on the ribbon winding type to be used. In the case of the outside-wound ribbon as shown in the following figure, the Ribbon Motor R turns in the counterclockwise direction, the “Gear 5R, Ribbon” (supply reel) turns in the clockwise direction via the “Gear 1, Ribbon”, “Gear 2, Ribbon”, “Gear 3, Ribbon” and “Gear 4, Ribbon”, and ribbon is supplied.

Gear 5R, Ribbon

Gear 1, Ribbon

Gear 2, Ribbon

Gear 3, Ribbon

Gear 4, Ribbon

Ribbon Motor R

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R

Gear 5F, Ribbon

Gear 1, Ribbon

Gear 2, Ribbon

Gear 3, Ribbon

Gear 4, Ribbon

Ribbon Motor F

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F

Taku-up Side Supply Side

PlatenMedia

Ribbon

Thermal Head

Page 26: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

Detecting Ribbon Tension (Tension Sensors): The same tension sensor is installed on the take-up and supply sides. Since the operation is the same on both sides, the take-up side operation is explained here: When ribbon is taken up, it tightens and the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” is pushed inward (in the direction of “A”). At this time, the claw “C” of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” is inserted into the photointerrupter of the “SA, Tension Sensor”, and the photointerrupter turns OFF. When printing starts, ribbon is fed forward together with media and it slacks. At this time, the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” is moved outward (in the direction of “B”) by the spring (“D”) force, and the claw “C” comes off the photointerrupter. So, the photointerrupter turns ON and the Ribbon Motor F starts to turn to take up ribbon. Then, the claw “C” is inserted into the photointerrupter again, and the Ribbon Motor F stops. This cycle is repeated and constant tension is applied to ribbon. On the supply side, when printing starts, ribbon is tightened contrary to the take-up side, and the tension sensor turns ON. Then, the Ribbon Motor R turns to supply ribbon.

Tension Adjustment Knob (Front)

SA, Tension Sensor(Photointerrupter)

Supporting Point

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F

Ribbon

D

Ribbon

A

B

C

Springs

Tension Adjustment Knob (Rear)

[Right side view]

Tension Adjustment Mechanism: To apply adequate ribbon tension, you can change the spring (“D”) force as follows: - Ribbon Tension Adjustment Knob F/R (for users)

Changes the spring force. The spring force is adjustable in 3 steps. As you move the knob toward the mark, the spring force becomes stronger .

- Tension Adjustment Screw (for service personnel) Can finely adjust the spring position. For details, refer to “3-6-3 Ribbon Tension Adjustment”.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-12

Page 27: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-13 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

2-1-5. Print Head Up/Down Detection Mechanism The component of the print head up/down detection mechanism is as follows: (a) Head up sensor (b) Protrusion that engages in the sensor The print head up/down detection mechanism detects the up (open)/down (close) status of the head block. When the head block is in the up position, the protrusion “A” is disengaged from the head up sensor. At this time, the head up sensor turns ON and “Low” level is output from the head up sensor. While, the head block is in the down position, the protrusion “A” is engaged in the head up sensor. At this time, the head up sensor turns OFF and “High” level is output from the head up sensor. The CPU on the Main PCB detects up or down position of the head block by sensing the output of the head up sensor.

Head Up Sensor(SA, Head Up Sensor PCB)

Head Block "Up" position

Head Block "Down" position

Head Block

SA, Head Up Sensor PCB

SA, Head Up Sensor PCB

PhotoInterrupter

PhotoInterrupter

A

A

A

Page 28: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-1-6. Head Balance Adjustment Mechanism The major components of the head balance adjustment mechanism are: (a) Lever, Head Balance (c) Spring, Head L/R (b) Cam, Head Balance The head balance adjustment mechanism is used to eliminate uneven printing density on media. The head balance adjustment is accomplished by changing the right side head pressure according to media width to be used. To adjust, the blue Media width adjustment dial (“Cam, Head Balance”) is used. When narrow width media is used, the dial should be set toward “0” to give weaker pressure. When wide width media is used, it should be set toward “9” to give stronger pressure. When narrow media is used (need to give weak pressure): The “Spring, Head L” and “Spring, Head R” act to press the “SA, Head” against the “SA, Platen”. If the same pressure is given by both springs, since no media exists on the right side of the “SA, Head”, the “SA, Head” will slant to the right, resulting in uneven printing density. The part “A” of the “Lever, Head Balance” is pushed against the cam part by the “Spring, Head R” and it moves up step by step as the Media width adjustment dial is turned toward “0”. As it moves up, the “Spring, Head R” is pressed with weaker force by the “Lever, Head Balance”, and the right side pressure against the “SA, Head” is decreased, resulting in even printing density. You need to align the dial number according to the media width to be used. (Smaller number for narrower media) When wide media is used (need to give strong pressure): The same principle applies to wide media. However, in this case, the Media width adjustment dial should be turned toward “9”. Then the part “A” of the “Lever, Head Balance” moves down to apply stronger pressure to the “SA, Head”. (Larger number for wider media)

Taward "9"

Spring, Head L (Fixed)

Spring, Head R (Movable)

Cam, Head Balance(Media Width Adjustment Dial)

SA, Head

Media (Narrow width)

SA, Head

Media (Wide width)

Taward "0"Weak

Strong

For narrow media

For wide media

SA, Platen

Lever, HeadBalance

ARibbon

Ribbon

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-14

Page 29: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-1. Operation of Each Mechanism

2-15 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

2-1-7. Media Offset Adjustment Mechanism The major components of the media thickness adjustment mechanism are: (a) Bracket, Head (b) SA, Head Adjust (Includes Head adjust lever and Media thickness adjustment dial.) According to the softness of media, the thermal element position is displaced from the optimum position. The head offset adjustment mechanism is used to correct this by moving the “SA, Head” back and forth a little. By performing the head adjustment properly, optimum printing quality is available. (When shipping, the Media thickness adjustment dial is set to “1”.) When soft media is used (thin thermal paper, label paper, etc.): When soft media is used, the optimum position of the thermal elements will be nearly right above the center of the “SA, Platen”. This position will be set when the Media thickness adjustment dial is set to “1”. When hard media is used (tag paper): When hard media is used, the optimum position of the thermal elements will shift toward the left a little from the center of the “SA, Platen”, viewing from the right side of the “SA, Platen”. As the optimum position varies according to the hardness of media, it is necessary to adjust the Media thickness adjustment dial from "1" to the greater number for the optimum position. As the Media thickness adjustment dial turns, the Head adjust lever also turns around the supporting point. At this time, as the end "A" of the “Bracket, Head” is inserted into the Head adjust lever, the “Bracket, Head” moves up and down. Note that the “Bracket, Head” turns around both “Bushing, Head” on both sides. When the Media thickness adjustment dial is set to the larger number, the end "A" of the Head Bracket lowers more. At this time, the thermal element position shifts to the left from the center of the “SA, Platen”, viewing from the right side of the “SA, Platen”.

Ribbon

0

9

Supporting point

For soft media

For hard mediaSA, Platen

Media

SA, Head

Thermal elements

(Head Adjust Lever)Media Thickness Adjustment Dial

SA, Head Holder (Fixed)

Bracket, Head

Supporting point

Groove

AA

Page 30: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-2. Operation of Control Parts 2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-16 16

2-2-1. Configuration of Printer The following shows major configuration blocks.

+5V, +24V

Head Up Sensor

Transparent Sensor

Reflective Sensor

Filter & Power Supply[Power Supply PCB]

AC Inlet &Power Switch

Serial I/F(USB)

Serial I/F(RS-232C) Host

(PC)

PF Motor

Thermal Print Head(Head Temp. Sensor)

Operation Panel[Ope-pane PCB]

[Main PCB]

Parallel I/F(IEEE1284)

Ribbon Motor F/R[Ribbon PCB]

Tension Sensor F/R

[Centro PCB]

Cutter

Peeler

Parallel I/F

Ethernet I/F PCB

(Options)

(Options)

Major functions of individual components are described below: (1) Filter & power supply section

Consists of a fuse, a filter circuit to eliminate external electric noise, and a switching type regulator to transform an AC input to +5V DC and +24V DC outputs required to drive the printer.

(2) Main PCB

Controls the entire operations of the printer. It consists of CPU, ROM, RAM, Custom IC, driver circuits, etc.

(3) Operation panel

A panel used to indicate the operating status of the printer and to set specifications. It consists of 4 keys and 4 LEDs.

Page 31: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-17 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(4) Thermal print head The thermal print head has the following thermal elements. It also has the print head driver circuit. • 864 dots for CL-S621/S621C • 1275 dots for CL-S631

(5) Sensors The following 7 sensors are used:

Sensor name DescriptionHead Up Sensor Photointerrupter.Transparent Sensor Photo sensor using the phototransistor.Reflective Sensor Photo sensor consisting of 2 LEDs and 1

phototransistor.Tension Sensor (Front/Rear) Photo sensor using the photointerrupter. Located on the

front and rear of the “Unit, Ribbon”.Head Temperature Sensor Thermistor incorporated in the print head.PF Motor Temperature Sensor Thermistor attached to the PF Motor.Ribbon Motor Temperature Sensor Thermistor attached to the Ribbon Motor F.

(6) Motor

Three motors are used. The PF Motor is a stepping motor to feed media. The Ribbon Motor F and Ribbon Motor R are stepping motors to take up and supply ribbon, respectively.

(7) Serial I/F (RS-232C)

This is a circuit to transmit and receive serial data between the printer and the host. Serial I/F, USB I/F or Parallel I/F (Option) is automatically selected when data is received.

(8) USB (Universal Serial Bus) I/F

This is a circuit to transmit and receive serial data between the printer and the host using the USB. Serial I/F, USB I/F or Parallel I/F (Option) is automatically selected when data is received.

(9) Parallel I/F (IEEE1284) (Option)

This is the parallel I/F to transmit and receive parallel data between the printer and the host. It supports Centronics Compatible mode, NIBBLE mode and ECP mode. Parallel I/F, serial I/F, or USB I/F is automatically selected when data is received.

(10) Ethernet I/F (Option)

This is a circuit which supports Ethernet protocol. LAN connection is possible.

Page 32: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-18

2-2-2. Operation of Control Unit (1) Block diagram

The following descriptions are for major functions of the components.

CPU

UPD703111AGM-13-UEU-A 128MHz

BZ

Head Up Sensor

AC Inlet & Power SwitchFlilter & Power Supply

S-DRAM (128Mbits)

Control / C.G. F-ROM(32Mbits)

Paper Feed Motor Stepping MotorDriver

Paper Sensor (Trans./Ref.)

Thermal Print Head

Gate Array

UPD65946GJ-165-3EB-A

Operation Panel

(SWx4 / LEDx3)

RS232C

IEEE1284

USB 1.1

MAIN PCB Peel Sensor

(Option) Peeler

Thermal Head Temp. Sensor

PF Motor Temp. Sensor

RS232C Driver/Reciever

IEEE1284 Transciever

Cutter Position Sensor

DC MOTOR Driver

(Option) Auto Cutter

Cutter Motor

Ethernet I/F

(Option)Interface Board

C.G. CL-S621 (KOREA, JAPAN) CL-S621C (CHINA) CL-S631 (KOREA, JAPAN)F-ROM(64Mbits)

Ribbon Tension Sensor x 2

Ribbon Motor x 2Stepping Motor Driver x 2

RIBBON PCB

Page 33: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-19 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(a) CPU The CPU is a microprocessor with 32-bit architecture. The clock fed to the CPU is 16 MHz. The CPU internally multiplies this 16 MHz by 8 times and uses 128 MHz clock. The CPU includes cache memory, RAMs, DMA controller, serial I/F, USB function controller, A/D converter, etc.

(b) Flash ROM A flash ROM of 32M bits (4M bytes) that stores the firmware and CG (character generator)

(c) SDRAM (Synchronous dynamic RAM) A SDRAM of 128M bits (16M bytes) that is used as working area, input buffer and download buffer

(d) Custom IC The custom IC incorporates a control circuit for the interface I/O port, motors, print head, etc.

(e) Head control This is a circuit to control the thermal head driver incorporated in the thermal head. It also checks if a thermal element of the thermal head is faulty.

(f) PF motor driver This is a circuit to drive the PF Motor. The PF Motor is a stepping motor.

(g) Ribbon motor driver This is a circuit to drive the Ribbon Motor F and Ribbon Motor R. These motors are stepping motors.

(h) Buzzer The buzzer is driven when an alarm, etc. occurs.

(i) Fan Cooling fan for the ribbon motor. When the temperature of the Ribbon Motor F (take-up side motor) exceeds a certain value, this fan starts to work.

Page 34: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-20

(2) Memory map

Command RAM(Built-in CPU)

0000000H

001FFFFH

Flash ROM 4MBytes

0100000H

0103FFFH0104000H

0105FFFH0106000H

0107FFFH0108000H

010FFFFH0110000H

03DFFFFH03E0000H

04DFFFFH04E0000H

04EFFFFH04F0000H

04FFFFFH

S-DRAM0800000H

16MBytes

0FFFFFFH

CPU

FFFB000H

FFFEFFFHFFFF000H

FFFFFFFH

CPU

Boot Loader (1)

Setting Information(User Settings)

Setting Information(Factory-set Settings)

Boot Loader (2)

Firmware (Datamax)

Downloading area (1MByte)(CSA, CSE)

Service Information (for backup)

Service Information

Firmware (about 400K bytes)Receiving Buffer (16K bytes x 3)*Command Buffer (128K bytes)Others

*: 16K bytes for each I/F (USB, IEEE1284 and Serial)

I/O (Built-in CPU)

Data RAM (Built-in CPU)

Firmware (Zebra)

028FFFFH0290000H

Custom IC4000000H

40FFFFFHI/O

Flash ROM 8MBytes

C3FFFFFHC400000H

C7FFFFFH

C000000H Downloading area (4MByte)(CHINA, KOREA, JAPAN)

Chinese/Korean Fonts (4MByte)(CHINA, KOREA, JAPAN)

Page 35: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-21 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(3) Sensors (3-1) Head up sensor

The head up sensor is used to detect the head position (up or down). This sensor uses a photointerrupter.) When the head block is closed (in the down position), the protrusion “A” of the head block is engaged in the head up sensor, and the light emitted from the LED of the photointerrupter is blocked by the protrusion “A”. Thus, the phototransistor turns OFF, and pin 117 (HDUSENS) of U1A (CPU) goes to "High" level. When the head block is opened (in the up position), the protrusion “A” is disengaged from the head up sensor, and the light emitted from the LED reaches the phototransistor. Thus, the phototransistor turns ON and pin 117 (HDUSENS) of U1A (CPU) goes to "Low" level.

[Main PCB][Head Up Sensor PCB]

Head Up SensorU1ACPU

2

3

1

+3.3V

HDUSENS

J8

R79

R78

C72

117PDH3

+3.3V

Head Up: LowHead Down: High

T31

R77

Head Up Sensor(SA, Head Up Sensor PCB)

Head Block "Up" position

Head Block "Down" position

Head Block

SA, Head Up Sensor PCB

SA, Head Up Sensor PCB

PhotoInterrupter

PhotoInterrupter

A

A

A

Page 36: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-22

(3-2) Transparent sensor and reflective sensor The transparent sensor is used to detect the label stuck on liner and the U-shaped notch on tag. On the other hand, the reflective sensor is used to detect the black mark printed on the bottom surface of tag. Both sensors are also used to detect the media end. The upper side transparent sensor is the phototransistor, and the lower side reflective sensor consists of 2 LEDs and 1 phototransistor. Media passes between these sensors. Transparent sensor (used for detecting the label or U-shaped notch): When the liner without label stuck on it passes between both sensors, the light emitted from the LEDs reaches the transparent sensor, passing through the liner. Thus, the transparent sensor (phototransistor) conducts and the voltage corresponding to the amount of light is applied to pin 5 (TRAMON) of U1A (CPU). Meanwhile, when the liner with the label stuck on it passes between both sensors, the light is blocked by the label and the transparent sensor (phototransistor) turns OFF. Thus, pin 5 (TRAMON) of U1A (CPU) goes "Low" level. From these levels, U1A (CPU) can detect the leading edge (arrival) of the label on liner. When media runs out, the light directly falls on the transparent sensor and media end is detected. In this case, pin 5 of U1A (CPU) will go "High" level. When the transparent sensor is conducted, the voltage at pin 5 (TRAMON) varies depending on the characteristics of the light receiving element (phototransistor) of the transparent sensor and other factors. To solve this problem, U11 (Custom IC) outputs TSNSCTL0 (pin 99) and TSNSCTL1 (pin 100) signals to turn ON/OFF (connect/disconnect) R71 and R72 (voltage dividing resistors) to minimize the difference in level at pin5 (TRAMON). The current flowing into the LEDs is determined by the data sent from the CPU to the digital-to-analog converter (U4). The digital-to-analog converter converts the data received from the CPU and outputs resoultant level at pin 2. The base current of the transistor Q7 is determined by this level. This means that the current flowing into the LEDs is also determined by this level. In the actual control, the CPU changes data (LED current) to keep the level at pin 5 of CPU constant.

Page 37: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-23 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Reflective sensor (used for detecting the black mark on tag): When tag with black marks is used, light is reflected by the tag. In the place where no black mark is there, the phototransistor of the reflective sensor conducts and the voltage corresponding to the amount of light is applied to pin 6 (REFMON) of U1A (CPU). When the light falls on the black mark, no light is reflected. In this case, the lower phototransistor turns OFF and pin 6 of U1A (CPU) will go “Low” level. When media runs out, the light is not reflected and no light falls on the reflective sensor. In this case, pin 6 of CPU will go “Low” level and media end is detected. When the reflective sensor is conducted, the voltage at pin 6 (REFMON) varies depending on the characteristics of the light receiving element (phototransistor) of the reflective sensor and other factors. To solve this problem, U1A (CPU) outputs RSNSCTL0 (pin 176) and RSNSCTL1 (pin 175) signals to turn ON/OFF (connect/disconnect) R74 and R75 (voltage dividing resistors) to minimize the difference in level at pin6 (REFMON). As to the current control of the LEDs, the operation is the same as for the transparent sensor mentioned above.

+5V

Media

Transparent Sensor

[Main PCB]

Reflective Sensor

3

2

3

4

1

45

J6

2

1 [Transparent Sensor PCB]

[Reflective Sensor PCB]

U4D/A Converter

LD

DI67 CK8

2DACCLKDACLD

DACDATFrom U1A CPU

BH2219

Transparent sensor output sensing terminal

B

J5

+3.3V

REFMON

TRAMONANI0

5

ANI16

U1A CPU

Reflective sensor output sensing terminal

+3.3V

PFCNT199

PFCNT2 100

U11 Custom ICTSNSCTL0TSNSCTL1

R75

R74

P72176

P73175

RSNSCTL0

RSNSCTL1

A

R73

R69U18B

BA2904

-+ 5

67

C70

T91

R76

R70U18A

-+ 3

21

T253

T251

+3.3V

C71

T93

D4

D5

BA2904

T152

T153

R66

R68

Q13DTC114EM

Q14DTC114EM

T63

T65

R67

U17A

-+3

21

C67

R63

R65R64

BA2904

T245

Q72SC5658

C68

R71

R72

Page 38: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-24

(3-3) Tension Sensor F/R The Tension Sensor F is used to detect the ribbon tension on the take-up side (front side) as well as ribbon running. While, the Tension Sensor R is used to detect the ribbon tension on the supply side (rear side) as well as the ribbon end. These sensors are photointerrupters. Tension Sensor F: The Tension Sensor F is used to keep the ribbon tension on the take-up side constant. When printing starts, ribbon is fed and take-up side ribbon slacks. Then, the claw of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” comes off the photointerrupter on the Tension Sensor PCB and the photointerrupter turns ON. Thus, pin 97 (SENS_A) of U11 (Custom IC) goes "High" level. Then, U1A (CPU) drives the Ribbon Motor F to take up ribbon. As a result, ribbon tightens and the claw is inserted into the photointerrupter. Thus, pin 97 (SENS_A) of U11 (Custom IC) goes "Low" level. Then, U1A (CPU) stops the Ribbon Motor F. During printing, this cycle is repeated and constant ribbon tension is maintained. The LED (D901) on the tension sensor lights when ribbon slacks (the claw of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” comes off the photointerrupter and the photointerrupter turns ON). The LED goes out when ribbon tightens. If ribbon is not correctly fed during printing, the ON/OFF state of the photointerrupter on the Tension Sensor F becomes improper. Thus, the CPU can detect a ribbon running error. Tension Sensor R: The Tension Sensor R is used to keep the ribbon tension on the supply side constant. When printing starts, ribbon is fed and supply side ribbon tightens. Then, the claw of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” is inserted into the photointerrupter on the Tension Sensor PCB and the photointerrupter turns OFF. Thus, pin 98 (SENS_B) of U11 (Custom IC) goes "Low" level. Then, U1A (CPU) drives the Ribbon Motor R to supply ribbon. As a result, ribbon slacks and the claw comes off the photointerrupter. Thus, pin 98 (SENS_B) of U11 (Custom IC) goes "High" level. Then, U1A (CPU) stops the Ribbon Motor R. During printing, this cycle is repeated and constant ribbon tension is maintained. In the same way as for Tension Sensor F, the LED (D901) on the tension sensor lights when ribbon slacks and goes out when ribbon tightens. When ribbon runs out, the ON/OFF state of the photointerrupter on the Tension Sensor R becomes unchangeable. Thus, the CPU can detect the ribbon end.

Page 39: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-25 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

[Tension Sensor PCB]

Tension Sensor

2

3

1

CN901

PI901

R901

C902

C901

+3.3V

4

+3.3VR902D901

Take-up side

[Tension Sensor PCB]

2

3

1

4

Supply side

2

3

1J703

4

(Same as above circuit)

CN901

2

3

1J704

4

[Ribbon PCB]

+3.3V

R705

+3.3V

C713C718

16U702A

18

17J702

U703A61

(Same as above circuit)

(3-4) Head temperature sensor The head temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the thermal head. This sensor is a thermistor incorporated in the “SA, Head”. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 7 of U1A (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 7 to detect the head temperature. According to the temperature of the print head, the CPU controls the printing pulse width applied to the thermal elements to keep the printing density constant. Printing operation when the head temperature rises: If the head temperature reaches 70°C (158°F), printing stops after printing the current label. In this case, PRINT LED and CONDITION LED simultaneously blink on the operation panel. When the temperature of the “SA, Head” falls below 60°C (140°F), LEDs stop blinking and printing will be resumed.

60°C (140°F)

70°C (158°F)

Printing (Stops)

(Stop)

Printing

Printing

J3 Thermal Head

5,6,8,11,1220,22

HDTHM2

+3.3V19

R44

HDTMP

U1A CPU

ANI27

Head Temp.Thermistor

[Main PCB]

C45

R43R7 21

HDTHM1

U11Custom IC

SENS_A97PM210

9

SENS_B98PM3

[Main PCB]

J12R706

Page 40: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-26 26

(3-5) PF motor temperature sensor (3-5) PF motor temperature sensor The motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the PF motor. This sensor is a thermistor bonded to the PF motor. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 8 of U1A (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 8 to detect the motor temperature.

The motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the PF motor. This sensor is a thermistor bonded to the PF motor. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 8 of U1A (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 8 to detect the motor temperature.

5J4

M PF Motor

6

Thermistor

+3.3V

R53C62

U1A CPU

[Main PCB]

MOTTMP ANI3

8 R8

Printing operation when motor temperature rises: Printing operation when motor temperature rises: When the temperature of the motor rises above 95°C (203°F), printing speed is reduced to avoid overheating. If it reaches 105°C (221°F), the motor stops after printing the current label. In this case, PRINT LED and CONDITION LED alternately blink on the operation panel.

When the temperature of the motor rises above 95°C (203°F), printing speed is reduced to avoid overheating. If it reaches 105°C (221°F), the motor stops after printing the current label. In this case, PRINT LED and CONDITION LED alternately blink on the operation panel. When the temperature of the motor falls below 90°C (194°F), LEDs stop blink and printing will be resumed. When the temperature of the motor falls below 90°C (194°F), LEDs stop blink and printing will be resumed.

90°C (194°F)

95°C (203°F)

Normal speed

(Stop)

Normal speed

Normal speed 105°C

(221°F)

Low speed (Stops)

(Stop)

Page 41: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-27 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(3-6) Ribbon motor temperature sensor The ribbon motor temperature sensor is used to detect the temperature of the Ribbon Motor F on the take-up side. This sensor is a thermistor bonded to the Ribbon Motor F. Since the resistance of the thermistor changes according to the temperature change, the voltage at pin 11 (RBTMP) of U1A (CPU) changes accordingly. The CPU senses the voltage at pin 11 to detect the ribbon motor temperature.

5

J701

M Ribbon Motor F(Take-up Side)6

Thermistor

R97C89

U1A CPU

[Ribbon PCB]

RBTMPANI6

11

9J702

20

+3.3V 1

12

J12

[Main PCB]

R96

Printing operation at ribbon motor temperature rise: When the temperature of the Ribbon Motor F reaches 85°C (185°F), the ribbon motor stops after printing the current label. In this case, PRINT LED and CONDITION LED alternately blink on the operation panel. When the temperature of the Ribbon Motor F falls below 80°C (176°F), LEDs stop blink and printing resumes.

80°C (176°F)

85°C (185°F)

Normal speed

(Stop)

Normal speed

Normal speed

(Stops)

Page 42: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-28

(4) Drivers (4-1) PF motor driver

This is a driving circuit to drive the PF motor (stepping motor). The following illustration shows a simplified circuit. The PF motor is driven by the bipolar constant current chopper method. The exciting method for the motor is the 1st-2nd phase method. The power to the PF motor is supplied by turning ON the FET Q5. This is accomplished by activating the monostable multivibrator U14A. When U14A is triggered, Q6 turns ON and Q5 turns ON. The exciting method is determined by PFMS1 and PFMS2 signals sent from U11 (Custom IC). The rotational direction of the PF motor is determined by PFDIR signal and the PF motor rotates when a pulse (PFCLK) is input to STEP (pin 14 of U15). The digital-to-analog converter (U4) is used to control the PF motor current. Its output is controlled by the data sent from the CPU (U1A). PF motor forcible stop function by circuitry: The CPU monitors the temperature of the PF motor and stops the PF motor if its temperature reaches 105°C (221°F), as mentioned in “(3-4) Motor temperature sensor”. In addition to this function, for further safety measures, a circuitry is provided to forcibly stop the PF motor if its temperature exceeds over 105°C (221°F). When the temperature reaches to a predetermined level, ENABLE (pin 2) of U15 becomes “Low” level and the outputs from U15 are disabled.

248

19

149

17

VBB1VBB2MS1MS2STEPDIR

U15Motor Driver

1

2

3

4

5

J4

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

M

PF Motor

18

21

1

22

U14AMonostableMultivibrator

CLR

A12 B3

Q 13Q6DTC114EM

T230Q5CPH6340

PFCLKFrom U1A CPU

PFONFrom U11 Custom ICnPRESETFrom RESET circuit

74VHC123

From U11 Custom IC

REF

C63R54

R52

1

T236PFMOTCU

[Main PCB]

Low: Turns on Q5 to supply

Motor current control

PFMS1PFMS2PFCLKPFDIR

15

6 Thermistor

+3.3V

R53C62

R61

From U1A CPU

ENABLE

U16A

-+ 2

31

R59

R62

R60

+3.3V

R58+3.3V

R57

power to the PF motor.

U4D/A Converter

LD

DI67 CK8

DACCLKDACLD

DACDATFrom U1A CPU

BH2219

BA

2

T235

A4984SES-T

+24VR46

R47

T224

VMT

Page 43: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-29 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(4-2) Ribbon motor driver This is a driving circuit to drive the Ribbon Motor F and Ribbon Motor R (stepping motors). The Ribbon Motor F is used to take up ribbon and the Ribbon Motor R is used to supply ribbon. The Ribbon Motor F/R is driven by the STEP_A/B signal sent from the CPU (U1A). The rotational direction of the motor is determined by the DIR_A/B signal sent from the custom IC (U11). The strength of PF motor excitation (strong and weak) is switched by the PDOWN signal sent from the CPU (U1A). The motor drive circuits for the Ribbon Motor F and Ribbon Motor R are the same. Ribbon motor forcible stop function by circuitry: The CPU monitors the temperature of the Ribbon Motor F and stops it if its temperature reaches a certain level, as mentioned in “(3-6) Ribbon motor temperature sensor”. In addition to this function, for further safety measures, a circuitry is provided to forcibly stop the ribbon motors if the temperature exceeds over 105°C (221°F). When the temperature reaches to a predetermined level, RBTMP (pin 7) of U16B becomes “Low” level and the supply power to the ribbon motors is shut down.

2417

19 VBB1VBB2DIRSTEP

U701Motor Driver

3

4

2

1

J701

OUT1A

OUT1B

OUT2A

OUT2B

M

Ribbon Motor F(Take-up Side)

18

21

1

22

U14BMonostableMultivibrator

CLR

A9

10 B11

Q 5From U1A CPU

RIBTRG

nRESET

74VHC123

REF

C719R709

PDOWN

[Main PCB]

15

14

Q703DTC114EM

R708 R707

11

12

13

14

J702

15

16

3

4

2

1

J705

M

Ribbon Motor R(Supply Side)

(Same as above circuit)

DIR_A

STEP_A

DIR_B

STEP_B

DIRSTEP

PDOWN

PDOWN

DIRSTEP

VMOTONU11 Custom IC

PM095

U1A CPU

D24 122

96PM1

126123

D28D25

3

4

5

6

7

8J12

[Ribbon PCB]

PDOWN

DIR_A

STEP_A

DIR_B

STEP_B

U704

1

RBTMP

2 4U22

R95U16B

-+ 5

67

R93

R98

R94

+3.3V

R92+3.3V

R91

RBTMP

RBTMP

Q702DTC114EM

Q701

VMTON

+24V

R701

R702

+3.3V

CPH6340

T707

Page 44: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-30

(4-3) Head driver The head driver is incorporated in the “SA, Head”. During printing, pin 116 (HDVON) of U11 (Custom IC) goes to "High" level, and Q2 and Q1 turn ON. Thus +24V is supplied to the thermal head (“SA, Head”). The print data is sent from the Custom IC (U11) to the head driver to select the thermal elements to be heated. The data is sent via HDATA1-HDATA3, HDSTB, HDCLK and HDLTH lines (pins 113, 111, 110, 108, 115 and 107 of U11). According to the print data received, the thermal head heats the thermal elements to print dots on thermal transfer paper. The width of heating pulse will be changed according to the head temperature to keep the printing density constant.

J3

Thermal Head

1-4,23-26

nHDSTBHDCLK

HDDAT1

nHDLAT

+5.0V

16

18

13

T160

T165T159

U11Custom IC

HDLTH 107

HDSTB 108

HDCLK 115

HDVON

HCVON

HDVON116

HCVON 117

+24VR33

R34

Q1Q2

Q4

DTC114EM

DTC114EM

T210

D3

2SJ661

D1

+3.3V U1A CPU

D2+3.3V

R39

R35

R37

R36 T99

T101

T211

Head supply voltage ON/OFF

Thermal element abnormality check ON

Head power supply monitor: Not used.

Thermal element abnormality check

[Main PCB]

When driving: +24VWhen checking: +5V

nHDSTBHDCLKnHDLAT

+3.3V

119

1G2G

74VHCT244

2A12A22A32A4

1A11A21A3

1A4

U13ABufferT164

T163T162

T161HDATA4 109

HDATA2 111

HDATA3 110

HDATA1 113 HD1HD2HD3HD4

2Y12Y22Y32Y4

1Y11Y21Y3

1Y4

5,6,8,11,12,20,22,28

HDDAT2

HDDAT3

7,9,1511

131517

246

89753

181614

12

R41 R42

C43

C44VHD

Q3DTA114EM

+5.0V

R38

VDD

T166T206

T167 T208

VHEADMON

HEADRES

ANI49

ANI510

VHD

19HDTHM1

17

14

10

Page 45: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-31 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Thermal resistance check: When the printer is turned ON, the thermal resistance check is conducted. If any fault is found, it is memorized and, when the printer is turned ON next time, the CONDITION LED and ERROR LED alternately blink on the operation panel. During the thermal resistance check, pin 117 (HCVON) of U11 (Custom IC) goes to "High" level, and Q4 and Q3 turn ON. Thus, +5V is supplied to the thermal head, instead of +24V. The following is a simplified circuitry under checking, where Q3 turns ON and a thermal element "R" is selected. At the point "A", the voltage divided by R38 and R is developed. The CPU monitors this voltage at pin 10 (HEADRES), and check if the voltage is out of the allowable range or not. (For example, if R is open, the voltage at point “A” will be about +3.3V.) Each thermal element is successively checked in this way.

+5V

U1ACPU

R38

R

A

R: Resistance of a thermal element

Q3

Thermal head

R39HEADRES ANI5

10

+3.3V

(4-4) Buzzer driver

This circuit drives the buzzer. To sound the buzzer, the CPU outputs a pulse from pin 171 (BUZZER). The transistor Q10 turns ON and OFF, and the buzzer sounds.

U1A CPU

BUZZER

+24V

[Main PCB]

P77 171

R86

Q10DTC114EM

T275T73

BZ1

Page 46: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-32 32

(4-5) Fan driver (4-5) Fan driver This circuit drives the ribbon motor cooling fan. This circuit drives the ribbon motor cooling fan. When pin 130 (FANCTL) is set to “Low” level, Q11 turns ON and the fan is driven. When pin 130 (FANCTL) is set to “Low” level, Q11 turns ON and the fan is driven. The fan is driven according to the Ribbon Motor F temperature detected by the ribbon motor temperature sensor. The fan is driven according to the Ribbon Motor F temperature detected by the ribbon motor temperature sensor. When the temperature is under 45°C (113°F), the fan is not driven. When the temperature is under 45°C (113°F), the fan is not driven. When the temperature exceeds 45°C (113°F) during ribbon motor running, the fan starts to turn. When the temperature exceeds 45°C (113°F) during ribbon motor running, the fan starts to turn. If the temperature is 70°C (158°F) or more after the ribbon motor is stopped, the fan is kept turned until the temperature falls below 70°C (158°F). If the temperature is 70°C (158°F) or more after the ribbon motor is stopped, the fan is kept turned until the temperature falls below 70°C (158°F).

(5) Other circuits (5) Other circuits

(5-1) +3.3V/+1.5V circuit (5-1) +3.3V/+1.5V circuit The Main PCB receives +5V and +24V from the “Unit, Power Supply”. +5V and +24V are used for control circuits and driver circuits, respectively. The Main PCB receives +5V and +24V from the “Unit, Power Supply”. +5V and +24V are used for control circuits and driver circuits, respectively. U19 and U20 are the regulator ICs to produce +3.3V and +1.5V from +5V. U19 and U20 are the regulator ICs to produce +3.3V and +1.5V from +5V. +3.3V is used for various logic circuits, while +1.5V is supplied to the CPU (U1A) only. +3.3V is used for various logic circuits, while +1.5V is supplied to the CPU (U1A) only.

3

4

1

45

2

J9

6

7

8

+24V+24V

+5V

+5V

D6

C79

T261+3.3V

C80

U19

AX6630-330DA

Vin1

Vout 3

GND2

VI O1O2

T262U20

BH15MA3WHFV

D7

C81

1 2

VSS 5STB

6

N3

++3.3V

+1.5V+1.5V

[Main PCB]

+3.3V Regulator

+1.5V Regulator

C77 C78+From Power SupplyUnit

C83

3

T267

T264

T260

1

2

J706

FAN

Ribbon Motor Fan

[Main PCB]

U1ACPU

D30 130FANOUT19

1

11

1

J702

[Ribbon PCB]

FANCTL

+5V

D701+5VJ12

J13+5V

Q11

R993LN02C

Page 47: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

2-33 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(5-2) Reset circuit This circuit performs the system reset. When power is turned ON, +3.3V gradually increases from 0V. When the voltage at pin 5 (+3.3V) of U3 reaches approx. at 2.8 V, U3 is activated and then the RESET signal changes from "Low" to "High" level. While the RESET signal is “Low”, the CPU (U1A) is reset. The CPU outputs the nGRESET signal to reset the Custom IC (U11) and other ICs. +1.5 V is supplied to the CPU. If +1.5 V is shut down, nRESET14 signal changes to “Low” level and all circuits including U1A (CPU) and U11 (Custom IC) are instantly reset.

VSS

+3.3V

12

4Voltage Detector

RESETRESET

L : Reset

26

U1ACPU

RESET

U11Custom IC

Power ON

Reset

+3.3V

RESET

+3.3V

H

L

0VP52

nGRESET

nGRESET

Pin 4 of U3

+3.3V

+1.5V

nRESET

U12

U3

NJU7705F3-28A

T118

C3VOUT

CdMR3

VDD5 28

23C4

GND

+1.5V

35

1Voltage DetectorU21

BU4213FVE

T263VOUT

CTSUB2

VDD4

C82

R80

nRESET15

R6

42

1 T204

T47

(5-3) Clock circuit Crystal oscillator X1 oscillates a 16 MHz clock. This clock is send to the CPU (U1A) and the CPU generates a 128 MHz internal clock and 64 MHz clock. The 64MHz clock is fed to the Custom IC (U11). Oscillator X2 oscillates a 48 MHz clock used for USB I/F control. It starts oscillation when UCLKON signal (pin 77) is output from the CPU to X2.

U1ACPU

U11Custom IC

X1

R1

C2

System Clock(16MHz)

T1

T2

BUSCLKPCD1 88 T117

CLKIN119

GND

+3.3V Clock Generator

Clock for USB(48MHz)

UCLKON PCT7

X2

VDDT15

FCXO-05 (48MHz)

STBY

OUT

P20

77

Bus Clock(64MHz)

Internal Clock(128MHz)

P10159

C1

BUSCLK

[Main PCB]

4

1

3

2 +3.3V

R2

R14

R3

16MHz

X1164

X2165

Page 48: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-2. Operation of Control Parts

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-34 34

(5-4) Ope-pane circuit (5-4) Ope-pane circuit The ope-pane circuit consists of 4 LEDs and 4 switches. The ope-pane circuit consists of 4 LEDs and 4 switches. Each LED is directly driven by the Custom IC (U11) and each switch signal is input to the Custom IC (U11). (The following shows the simplified circuit diagram.) Each LED is directly driven by the Custom IC (U11) and each switch signal is input to the Custom IC (U11). (The following shows the simplified circuit diagram.)

3

4

1

45

2

J7

6

7

8

+3.3V

[Main PCB]

9

10

11

12

PRTLEDCNDLEDERRLED

STOPSWMODESW

PAUSESWFEEDSW

+3.3V

[Ope-pane PCB]

POWER ON (Green)

PRINT (Green)

CONDITION (Orange)

ERROR (Red)

FEED

PAUSE

STOP

MODE/REPEAT

+3.3V

To/FromU11 Custom IC

D304

D303

D302

SW302

SW303

SW304

SW301

D301

(5-5) USB I/F control circuit (5-5) USB I/F control circuit

The USB control circuit interfaces with the USB (Universal Serial Bus). The USB control circuit interfaces with the USB (Universal Serial Bus). NAND gates (U26A, U26B and U26C) and transistor Q12 consist of a USB connection detecting circuit. When USB connector is connected to the printer, pin 1 of J16 (USBVCC) is set to “High” level. The detection circuit detects this level and output a UBINTP pulse to the CPU to inform of the USB connection.

NAND gates (U26A, U26B and U26C) and transistor Q12 consist of a USB connection detecting circuit. When USB connector is connected to the printer, pin 1 of J16 (USBVCC) is set to “High” level. The detection circuit detects this level and output a UBINTP pulse to the CPU to inform of the USB connection.

USB connection detecting circuit

12345

T12 R117

T18

T40

R113

R118

T325

J16

R116T26

T234

R119

Q12DTA114EM

C102

R114UBINTP

UDPUDM

SG

USBVCC

USBLGNDDPDM

USB I/F

R11546 598

10

1 32

+3.3V

+3.3V

U1ACPU

USBONP11

155

D23121

160161

UDPUDM

T323

[Main PCB]

High when USB connector is connected.

R112

U26C

U26A

U26B

Page 49: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-3. Operation Panel 2-3. Operation Panel

2-35 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Operation panel is located on the left/front side of the printer. Operation panel consists of 4 keys and 4 LEDs, which perform to set the condition of the printer and indicate the operating condition.

PAUSE STOPFEED

MODE/REPEAT

ERROR

PRINT

CONDITION

POWER 2-3-1. External view (1) Keys

There are 4 keys, [MODE/REPEAT], [PAUSE], [FEED] and [STOP]. The function name on the key is selected when the key is pressed.

(2) LEDs

There are 4 LEDs, POWER, PRINT, CONDITION and ERROR. The LEDs light up or blink to indicate printer status, setting modes, or error conditions. POWER LED lights up when power is turned on. (green) PRINT LED lights up when the printer is ready to print (on-line state). (green) It is also used in Menu Setting mode and Sensor Adjustment mode. CONDITION LED lights up in Menu Setting mode or Sensor Adjustment mode. (orange) ERROR LED lights or blinks when error occurs. (red) (To indicate an error, PRINT and CONDITION LEDs will be also used.)

Page 50: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-3-2. Operation using the keys The following explains the normal operation and test operation accessible by pressing and holding the keys while turning ON the power. In this manual, pressing and holding the key while turning the power ON is described as follows:

[POWER] [Key name] [Key name] + + Example: [MODE] + [POWER] (to enter menu setting mode) (1) Normal operation

The following two operations are available.

Operation Description Remarks [PAUSE] + [FEED] + [STOP] + [POWER]

Enters sensor adjustment mode.

See (1-1). For details, see the User's Manual.

[MODE] + [POWER] Enters menu setting mode.

See (1-2). For details, see the User's Manual.

(1-1) Sensor adjustment mode

According to media to be used, you need to perform the sensor adjustment. The following shows the rough description how to adjust the sensor. For details, refer to the User’s manual. Before performing the sensor adjustment, select the Media Sensor menu (“See Through”, “Reflect”, or “None”) according to media to be used. See “(1-2) Menu setting mode” on the next page.

Media Sensor menu Media See Through Label paper or tag with U-shaped notches Reflect Tag with black marks None Continuous media

All operations are made with the key. 1. Entering the sensor adjustment mode ([PAUSE] + [FEED] + [STOP] + [POWER]) 2. Selecting the sensor to be used (either the transparent sensor or reflective sensor)

Transparent sensor: Label paper, Tag with U-shaped notches Reflective sensor: Tag with black marks

3. Positioning of the sensor(s) against media 4. Sensitivity adjustment using actual media to be used

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-36

Page 51: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-37 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(1-2) Menu setting mode Set the menu according to your requirements. The following shows the menu settings print sample. To enter this mode, while pressing and holding the [MODE] key, turn ON the power. ([MODE] + [POWER]) For details, refer to the User’s Manual.

Machine Information Model Number : CL-S631 Boot Version : X.X ROM Version : DRXXXXXX ROM Date(DD//MM//YY) : XX/XX/XX ROMCheck Sum : XXXX Head Check : OK Print Counter : 0002.2km Service Counter : 0002.2km Cut Counter : 0 Sensor Monitor : 2.78V O ption Interface : None

C

urrent Menu Settings [Global Config Menu] C onfig Set : 1

[PageSetup Menu] Print Speed : 4 IPS Print Darkness : 10 Darkness Adjust : 00 Print Method : Thermal Transfer Ribbon Winding : Outside Continuous Media Length : 4.00 inch Vertical Position : 0.00 inch Horizontal Shift : 0.00 inch Vertical Image Shift : 0.00 inch Media Sensor : See Through Small Media Adjustment : Off Small Media Length : 1.00 inch S ymbol Set : PM

[System Setup Menu] Sensor Level : 1.5 V Paper End Level : 2.80 V Error Reporting : On Printing Buzzer Select : On Metric/Inch : Inch Max Media Length : 10.00 inch Settings Lock : Off Keyboard Lock : Off Control Code : STD Emulation Select : DM4 E mulation Auto Detect : On

[After Print Menu] AutoConfigure : On Function Select : Tear Cutter Action : Backfeed Paper Position : 0.00 inch M ode/Repeat Key : Disabled

[Interface Menu] RS-232C Baud rate : 9600 RS-232C Parity : None RS-232C Length : 8 bit RS-232C Stop bit : 1 bit RS-232C X-ON : Yes IEEE1284 : On USB Device Class : Printer USB VCOM Protocol : Auto

Page 52: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

(2) Test mode The following test modes are available.

Operation Description Remarks [FEED] + [POWER] Enters self print mode See (2-1). [STOP] + [POWER] Enters hex dump mode See (2-2).

(2-1) Self print mode

You can check the printing quality by printing the self print pattern.

Media feed direction

[Print pattern in self print mode] For label (prints 2 labels): 1. While pressing and holding the [FEED] key, turn

on the power. 2. When the PRINT LED blinks slowly (later, it will

blink rapidly), release the [FEED] key. The printer enters self print mode. The label is fed, self test printing is made for two labels, and then printing stops.

3. To repeat printing, press the [FEED] key again. To exit self print mode, turn off the power.

For continuous media: 1. While pressing and holding the [FEED] key, turn

on the power. 2. The PRINT LED will blink slowly. When it changes

to rapid blink, release the [FEED] key. The printer enters self print mode and self test printing is made.

3. To repeat printing, press the [FEED] key again. To exit self print mode, turn off the power.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-38

Page 53: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-39 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(2-2) Hex dump mode (2-2) Hex dump mode You can print the data in the receive buffer in the hexadecimal form. You can print the data in the receive buffer in the hexadecimal form. For label: For label: 1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power. 1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power. 2. When the PRINT LED blinks slowly2. When the PRINT LED blinks slowly (later, it will blink rapidly), release the [STOP] key.

The printer enters hex dump mode and hex dump printing starts. To exit hex dump mode, turn off the power.

For continuous media: 1. While pressing and holding the [STOP] key, turn on the power. 2. The PRINT LED will blink slowly. When it changes to rapid blink, release the [STOP] key.

The printer enters hex dump mode and hex dump printing starts. To exit hex dump mode, turn off the power.

DUMP LIST 02 40 30 31 30 30 0D 02 60 30 30 32 30 0D 02 4C .M0100..c0020..L 44 31 31 0D 31 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 30 D11.100000000010

30 30 31 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 0010123456789:;<

[Dump list example] (3) Factory/Service mode

Operation Description Remarks All keys + [POWER] Enters factory mode and service mode

(3-1) General

Factory mode and Service mode are available for maintenance. Factory mode: You can change the factory-set items such as logical shift of the sensor or head, and double heat (printing the same dot twice). Note: • In Factory mode, DO NOT change the factory-set values unless you need it, since

there are essential items related to printing accuracy, etc. Service mode: You can perform checks such as “head check “and “counter print” to print the total print length since the printer is firstly used.

Page 54: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-40

(3-2) How to enter the Factory/Service Mode How to enter Factory/Service mode differs from the “user menu setup mode” operation. However, once you have entered Factory/Service mode, the basic operation is the same as that for the “user menu setup mode” explained in the User’s manual. The Factory/Service mode menu appears at the top of the user menus as follows:

PAUSE STOPFEED

MODE/REPEAT

No / Next item / Increase itemYes / Select / Save

Next digit

Exit the current menu or the Vu Print menu system

e

The menu operation principle is the same as for the “user menu setup mode” operation. The keys to be used and the functions are as follow:

All keys + POWER

Factory Mode menu

Service Mode menu

Global config menu Page Setup menu System Setup menu After Print menu Interface menu

Do you want to change the menu settings? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

Top menus

Added

[PAUSE (Yes)] VuePrint menu system

Do you want to print the current menu settin [PAUSE (Yes)]

To print gs? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

: Different operation from the “user menu setup mode”

Page 55: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-41 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

[Menu settings print sample in Factory/Service mode] [Menu settings print sample in Factory/Service mode]

Machine Information Machine Information Model Number : CL-S631 Model Number : CL-S631 Boot Version : X.X Boot Version : X.X ROM Version : DRXXXXXX ROM Version : DRXXXXXX ROM Date(DD//MM//YY) : XX/XX/XX ROM Date(DD//MM//YY) : XX/XX/XX ROMCheck Sum : XXXX ROMCheck Sum : XXXX Head Check : OK Head Check : OK Print Counter : 0002.2km Print Counter : 0002.2km Service Counter : 0002.2km Service Counter : 0002.2km Cut Counter : 0 Cut Counter : 0 Sensor Monitor : 2.78V Sensor Monitor : 2.78V Option Interface : None Option Interface : None Factory Mode Settings Factory Mode Settings Through Sensor Position : 0 dot Through Sensor Position : 0 dot Reflect Sensor Position : 0 dot Reflect Sensor Position : 0 dot Machine Tear Position : 0 dot Machine Tear Position : 0 dot Machine Cut Position : 0 dot Machine Cut Position : 0 dot Machine Peel Position : 0 dot Machine Peel Position : 0 dot Machine Horizontal Pos. : 8 dots Machine Horizontal Pos. : 8 dots AutoCal Mode : On AutoCal Mode : On See Through Sensor : 0.0 V See Through Sensor : 0.0 V Reflect Sensor : 0.0 V Reflect Sensor : 0.0 V SeeThrough Sensitivity : Low SeeThrough Sensitivity : Low Reflect Sensitivity : Low Reflect Sensitivity : Low Through Cal Level : 2.30 V Through Cal Level : 2.30 V Reflect Cal Level : 2.10 V Reflect Cal Level : 2.10 V SensNone Cal Level : 2.05 V SensNone Cal Level : 2.05 V Darkness Rate : High Darkness Rate : High Double Heat Menu : Off Double Heat Menu : Off PowerOn Head Check : On PowerOn Head Check : On Head Check Start Pos. : Dot 1 Head Check Start Pos. : Dot 1 Head Check Stop Pos. : Dot 848 Head Check Stop Pos. : Dot 848 Head Error Print : No Head Error Print : No Max Page Length : 32 inch Max Page Length : 32 inch Ribbon Control : Auto Ribbon Control : Auto Ribbon End Detection : Quick Ribbon End Detection : Quick Void to TOF : Off Void to TOF : Off Reverse Media Length : 0.00 inch Reverse Media Length : 0.00 inch Min Cut Length : Default Min Cut Length : Default Paper End Sensor : On Paper End Sensor : On Paper End Length : Default Paper End Length : Default Parallel Error Output : On Parallel Error Output : On Auto Online : Off Auto Online : Off Auto Online Delay : 2 sec Auto Online Delay : 2 sec Top Form Sensing : On Top Form Sensing : On USB Serial Number : Off USB Serial Number : Off Auto Exec Print : On Auto Exec Print : On Config Print Layout : Standard Config Print Layout : Standard Head Clean Message : Off Head Clean Message : Off Print Preference : Darkness Print Preference : Darkness CLPID Mode : Off CLPID Mode : Off Current Menu Setting Current Menu Setting [Global Config Menu] [Global Config Menu] Config Set : 1 Config Set : 1 [PageSetup Menu] [PageSetup Menu] Print Speed : 4 IPS Print Speed : 4 IPS (to be continued) (to be continued)

Submenus for maintenance only

Page 56: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

Print Darkness : 10 Darkness Adjust : 00 Print Method : Thermal Transfer Ribbon Winding : Outside Continuous Media Length : 4.00 inch Vertical Position : 0.00 inch Horizontal Shift : 0.00 inch Vertical Image Shift : 0.00 inch Media Sensor : See Through Small Media Adjustment : Off Small Media Length : 1.00 inch Symbol Set : PM [System Setup Menu] Sensor Level : 1.5 V Paper End Level : 2.80 V Error Reporting : On Printing Buzzer Select : On Metric/Inch : Inch Max Media Length : 10.00 inch Settings Lock : Off Keyboard Lock : Off Control Code : STD Emulation Select : DM4 Emulation Auto Detect : On [After Print Menu] AutoConfigure : On Function Select : Tear Cutter Action : Backfeed Paper Position : 0.00 inch Mode/Repeat Key : Disabled [Interface Menu] RS-232C Baud rate : 9600 RS-232C Parity : None RS-232C Length : 8 bit RS-232C Stop bit : 1 bit RS-232C X-ON : Yes IEEE1284 : On USB Device Class : Printer USB VCOM Protocol : Auto

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-42

Page 57: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-43 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

[Procedure to enter Factory/Service Mode] [Procedure to enter Factory/Service Mode] 1. Set media. 1. Set media. 2. While pressing and holding all keys, turn on the power. (ALL keys + [POWER]) 2. While pressing and holding all keys, turn on the power. (ALL keys + [POWER]) The printer enters Factory/Service mode. The PRINT LED and CONDITION LED light up

and the following message is printed on media. The printer enters Factory/Service mode. The PRINT LED and CONDITION LED light up

and the following message is printed on media.

Do you want to reset this printer to factory settings? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

Citizen CL-S631 VuePrint Menu System

The four control panel buttons are used to select different options. Generally: Yes / Select / Save = PAUSE (P) key No / Next Item / Increase Item = STOP (S) key Next Digit = FEED (F) key Exit to previous menu = MODE (M) key

3. Press the [STOP] key to skip to the next message. 3. Press the [STOP] key to skip to the next message. Then, the following message is printed. Then, the following message is printed.

Do you want to print the current menu settings? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

4. Press the [STOP] key to skip to the next message. 4. Press the [STOP] key to skip to the next message. Then, the following message is printed. Then, the following message is printed.

5. Press the [PAUSE] key to enter the menu settings mode. 5. Press the [PAUSE] key to enter the menu settings mode. Then, the following top menu is printed. Then, the following top menu is printed.

Do you want to change the menu settings? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

Do you want to change “Factory Mode Menu” items? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

• To enter the Factory Mode menu, proceed to the next step 6. • To enter the Factory Mode menu, proceed to the next step 6. • To skip to the next top menu (Service Mode menu), press the [STOP] key. See step 7. • To skip to the next top menu (Service Mode menu), press the [STOP] key. See step 7. • To return to the previous one, press the [MODE] key. • To return to the previous one, press the [MODE] key. 6. Press the [PAUSE] key to enter the submenus. 6. Press the [PAUSE] key to enter the submenus.

* The following submenus under the Factory Mode menu will be printed as you press the [PAUSE] key repeatedly.

* The following submenus under the Factory Mode menu will be printed as you press the [PAUSE] key repeatedly.

* For setting each item, see “(3-3)-(a) Factory Mode menu table”, and setting example “How to change the value in the Factory Mode menu” on page 2-48.

* For setting each item, see “(3-3)-(a) Factory Mode menu table”, and setting example “How to change the value in the Factory Mode menu” on page 2-48.

Through Sensor Position +000 Through Sensor Position +000 S S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Reflect Sensor Position +000 Reflect Sensor Position +000 S S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Mach Tear Pos +000 Mach Tear Pos +000 S S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) (to be continued) (to be continued)

Page 58: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

Mach Cut Pos +000 S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Mach Peel Pos +000 S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Mach Hor Pos +08 S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) AutoCal Mode ON S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) SeeThrough Sensor 0.0 S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Reflect Sensor 0.0 S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) SeeThrough Sensitivity Low S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Reflect Sensitivity Low S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Darkness Rate High S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Double Heat Menu OFF S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) PowerOn Head Check ON S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Ribbon End Detection Quick S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Parallel Error Out ON S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) USB Serial Number OFF S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Auto Exec Print ON S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Config Print Layout Standard S ave=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Print Preference Darkness Save=(PAUSE) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

Note: In the actual printing, the cursor “^” will be printed instead of “ (underline)”.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-44

Page 59: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-45 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

7. When the Service Mode Menu message is printed as shown below, press the [PAUSE] key

to enter its submenus. * The following submenus will be printed successively as you press the [PAUSE] key

repeatedly. * When you press the [PAUSE] key, check is done and the check result will be printed.

For performing each item, see “(3-3)-(b) Service Mode menu table” and setting example “How to perform the check in the Service Mode menu” on page 2-50.

Do you want to change “Service Mode Menu” items? Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

Head Check Exec Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) ROM Check Exec Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) RAM Check Exec Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Print Counter Exec Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Service Counter Exec Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Cutter Counter Exec Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

Do you want to change “Page Setup Menu” items? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

8. To exit the Factory/Service mode, press the [MODE] key.

Page 60: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

(3-3) Factory/Service Mode menu table The following table shows the value and description of each submenu under Factory Mode menu and Service Mode menu.

(a) Factory Mode menu table

*: “+” shows that the object logically moves forward/rightward. “-“ shows that the object logically moves backward/leftward.

**: For both CL-S621/S621C and CL-S631, 8 dots correspond to 1 mm for each adjustment value. (Namely, 203 dots correspond to 1”.)

Submenu Name Adjustable Value (Default Value)

Description

Through Sensor Position (See Note.)

-256 to +256 [dots](+000 [dots])

Logically shifts the transparent sensor position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”)

Reflect Sensor Position (See Note.)

-256 to +256 [dots] (+000 [dots])

Logically shifts the reflective sensor position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”)

Mach Tear Pos -256 to +256 [dots](+000 [dots])

Logically shifts the tear off position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”)

Mach Cut Pos -256 to +256 [dots](+000 [dots])

Logically shifts the cutting position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) (Optional)

Mach Peel Pos -256 to +256 [dots](+000 [dots])

Logically shifts the peel position back and forth. (-32 to +32 mm, -1.26 to +1.26”) (Optional)

Mach Hor Pos -16 to +16 [dots] (+08 [dots])

Logically shifts the head position back and forth. (-3 to +1 mm, -0.12 to +0.04”)

AutoCal Mode ON, OFF (ON)

Automatically controls the light amount in each Media sensor menu (See Through, Reflect, None).

SeeThrough Sensor

0.0 to 3.3 [V] (0.0 [V])

This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set to OFF. The light amount in Media sensor menu “See Through” can be changed manually. Larger value emits larger amount of light.

Reflect Sensor 0.0 to 3.3 [V] (0.0 [V])

This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set to OFF. The light amount in Media Sensor menu “Reflect” can be changed manually. Larger value emits larger amount of light.

SeeThrough Sensitivity

Low, Medium, High(Low)

This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set to OFF. The sensitivity of the transparent sensor can be changed in 3 levels.

Reflect Sensitivity Low, Medium, High(Low)

This menu is effective when “AutoCal Mode” is set to OFF. The sensitivity of the reflective sensor can be changed in 3 levels.

Darkness Rate High, Low (High)

The rate for darkness increase/decrease can be set.

Double Heat Menu

ON, OFF (OFF)

To display the item “Double Heat Menu” in the “PageSetup Menu” or not is selectable.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-46

Page 61: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-47 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Submenu Name Adjustable Value (Default Value)

Description

PowerOn Head Check

ON, OFF (ON)

To perform the head check at power ON or not is selectable.

Ribbon End Detection

Quick, Normal, Slow (Quick)

Sets the ribbon end detection time.

Parallel Error Out ON, OFF (ON)

To set the Fault signal to ON or not at the time of error occurrence in parallel interface is selectable.

USB Serial Number

ON, OFF (OFF)

To send the serial number to the host when the USB interface is connected to the printer or not is selectable.

Auto Exec Print ON, OFF (ON)

To execute the Auto Exec file stored in the printer at power ON or not is selectable.

Config Print Layout

Standard, Reversed(Standard)

Print layout type can be selected. Standard: Prints setting items on the left and set values on the right. Reversed: Prints set values on the left and setting items on the right.

Print Preference Darkness, Speed (Darkness)

To put the priority on printing density or printing speed is selectable.

Note: “Through Sensor Position” adjustment and “Reflect Sensor Position” adjustment must

be done after one of the following parts is replaced. • SA, Main PCB • SA, Transparent Sensor PCB • SA, Reflective Sensor PCB

Page 62: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-48

How to change the value in the Factory Mode menu For example, the following shows how to logically move the thermal head position 1 mm (0.04”) toward the right side. In this case, you should add 8 (dots) to the current value (e.g. +08). • Variable range: -16 to +32 dots (default +08 dots) (-2 to +4 mm, -0.08 to +0.16”) • 8 dots correspond to 1 mm. (203 dots correspond to 1”.) 1. Perform steps 1-6 on page 2-43 to enter the Factory Mode menu. See “(b) How to enter

the Factory/Service Mode”. 2. Press the [PAUSE] key until “Mach Hor Pos” submenu is printed.

Do you want to change “Factory Mode Menu” items? Y es=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Through Sensor Position +000 S ave=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) : : Mach Hor Pos +08 Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

Note: In the actual printing, the cursor “^” will be printed instead of “ (underline)”. 3. To set the value to 16 (8 plus 8), press the [FEED] key to move the cursor to the next digit

(+08), and then press the [STOP] key once to specify “1”. Each time you press the key, the value of the current digit with the cursor will scroll (0, 1, 2,

3, 4, ...., 9, 0). 4. Next, press the [FEED] key to move the cursor to the next digit (+18). The changed value is printed.

Mach Hor Pos +18 Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

5. Press the [STOP] key 8 times to specify “6”. Each time you press the key, the value will scroll (8, 9, 0, 1, ...., 6). 6. To save the set value, press the [PAUSE] key. The set value will be printed. Be sure that the new value is “16”, and then press the

[MODE] key to exit the item. * If the value is not the one you expected, repeat above operation.

Mach Hor Pos +16 Save=(PAUSE) Next Digit=(FEED) Change value=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

1 mm

[Front]

Head +

Page 63: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

2-49 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(b) Service Mode menu table Submenu Name Value Description

Head Check None [PAUSE]: Checks the number of defective thermal elements and prints it. If no defective thermal element is found, “0” will be printed. Example: Bad head element: 0 dot(s) [STOP]: Nothing is printed.

ROM Check None [PAUSE]: Performs ROM checksum test, and prints the check result (OK or NG) and the checksum value. Example: PROGRM ROM OK 4F4E [STOP]: Nothing is printed.

RAM Check None [PAUSE]: Performs RAM capacity check and prints the check result. Example: RAM OK 16384K [STOP]: Nothing is printed.

Print Counter None [PAUSE]: Prints the total printed length accumulated from when the printer is firstly used. Example: Length 1234.5Km [STOP]: Nothing is printed.

Service Counter None [PAUSE]: Prints the service counter length in Km accumulated from when it was reset last time. Example: Length 0123.4Km

Clear Service Counter ? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

To clear the service counter, press the [PAUSE] key again. To quit, press the [STOP] key.

[STOP]: Nothing is printed. Cut Counter None [PAUSE]: Prints the cut counter value

accumulated from when it was reset last time. Example: Count 10

Clear Cut Counter ? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP)

To clear the cut counter, press the [PAUSE] key again. To quit, press the [STOP] key.

[STOP]: Nothing is printed.

Page 64: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-3. Operation Panel

How to perform the check in the Service Mode menu For example, the following shows how to perform the head check. For example, the following shows how to perform the head check. 1. Perform steps 1-7 on pages 2-43 to 2-45 to enter the Service Mode menu. See “(b) How to

enter the Factory/Service Mode”. 1. Perform steps 1-7 on pages 2-

2. Press the [PAUSE] key until “Head Check” submenu is printed. 2. Press the [PAUSE] key until “Head Check” submenu is printed.

Do you want to change “Service Mode Menu” items? Do you want to change “Service Mode Menu” items? Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Head Check Exec Head Check Exec Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE) Yes=(PAUSE) No=(STOP) Exit=(MODE)

3. Press the [PAUSE] key to check for head abnormality. 3. Press the [PAUSE] key to check for head abnormality. The number of faulty thermal elements is printed. The number of faulty thermal elements is printed. Example: Bad head element: 0 dot(s) Example: Bad head element: 0 dot(s) After printing the check result, the next submenu is automatically printed. After printing the check result, the next submenu is automatically printed. If you press the [STOP] key, nothing is printed. If you press the [STOP] key, nothing is printed.

2-3. Operation Panel

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-50

How to perform the check in the Service Mode menu

43 to 2-45 to enter the Service Mode menu. See “(b) How to enter the Factory/Service Mode”.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-50

Page 65: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-4. Interface

2-4. Interface

2-51 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

2-4-1. Serial Interface (1) Specifications

System Start/stop asynchronous full duplex communication Signal level RS-232C Baud rate 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps Data length 7 bits, 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit, 2 bits Parity Odd, even, none Connector D-SUB JHBY-25S-1A3G 25PIN (JST)

(2) Signal line and pin assignment

Pin No. Signal Abbr.

Signal name Function

1 FG Frame ground Protective grounding 2 TXD Transmit Data Signal line that transmits data from the printer to

the host 3 RXD Receive data Signal line that transmits data from the host to

the printer 4 RTS Request To Send Pulled up to +12V through 3.3 kΩ 5 NC ------ Not used 6 DSR Data Set Ready Signal line that is active when the host can

interface with the printer 7 SGND Signal ground Signal grounding line

8-17, 19 NC ------ Not used 18 VCC +5V (Factory use only ) 20 DTR Data Terminal

Ready Signal line that is active when the printer can interface with the host

21-25 NC ------ Not used

Page 66: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-4. Interface

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-52

(3) Protocol XON/XOFF system:

Controlled with the data transmission request signal X-ON (11H) code and the data transmission stop request signal X-OFF (13H) code.

The conditions for the X-ON code output are as follows: • When the printer is turned from off-line to on-line. • When the remaining of receive buffer is 1024 bytes or more after sending X-OFF code. The conditions for the X-OFF code output are as follows: • When the remainder of receive buffer is 128 bytes or less. • When the printer is turned from on-line to off-line. When the media end is detected. When a printer error occurs.

X-ON code sending

X-OFF code sending

16K bytes

1024 bytes

128 bytes

Received data

0 16K

READY/BUSY System: DTR signal is controlled with READY ("High")/BUSY ("Low") level. DTR turns to "High (Ready)" in the following conditions: • When the printer is in on-line mode, and • When the remaining buffer is 128 bytes or more.

(After DTR becomes "High", DTR retains "High" until the remaining buffer becomes 1024 bytes or less.)

DTR turns to "Low (Busy)" in the following conditions: • When the printer is in off-line mode. • When the remaining buffer is less than 128 bytes.

(After DTR becomes "Low", DTR retains "Low" until the remaining buffer becomes 1024 bytes or more.)

Page 67: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-4. Interface

2-53 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

2-4-2. USB Interface (1) Specifications

Standards Complies with Universal Serial Bus Specification Transmission speed Compatible with 12Mbps (full speed) transmission Receive buffer 16K bytes Connector DUSB DUSB-BRA42-T11 (DDK)

(2) Signal line and pin arrangement

Pin No. Signal code Signal Function 1 VBUS USB power USB power (+5V) 2 D+ Signal line + + signal line 3 D- Signal line - - signal line 4 GND GND GND

2-4-3. Parallel Interface (Option) (1) Specifications

Transmission system 8-bit parallel data Receive buffer size 16K bytes Transmission modes Compatible mode

It is an asynchronous forward channel mode to send the byte width data from the host to the printer. The interface line of the data is operated in accordance with signal line definitions of Centronics. NIBBLE mode It is an asynchronous reverse channel mode to send the data from the printer to the host. In Nibble mode, 4-bit data (half byte) is sent at a time using the 4 status lines (FAULT, SELECT, PE, and BUSY). To send one complete byte data, the printer sends 2 nibbles (8 bits in total) to the host. Nibble mode is usually combined with Compatible mode to create a complete bi-directional channel. ECP mode ECP mode permits bi-directional asynchronous data transmission, and by means of interlock handshake, it does not require the timing necessary with Compatible mode.

Signal level IEEE1284 compatible

Page 68: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-4. Interface

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-54 54

(2) Signal line and pin assignment (2) Signal line and pin assignment

Pin No. Signal name I/O Function in Compatible Mode 1 STROBE Input Strobe signal to read in 8-bit data

2-9 DATA0-7 Input 8-bit parallel signal 10 ACKNLG Output 8-bit data request signal 11 BUSY Output Signal specifying printer busy 12 PERROR Output Signal specifying media end 13 SELECT Output Signal specifying if the printer is on-line (printing enabled)

or off-line 14 AUTOFD Input Invalid (ignored) 15 NC --- Not used 16 SGND --- Signal ground 17 FGND --- Frame ground 18 P.L.H Output Peripheral logic high (pulled up to +5V at 1KΩ)

19-30 GND --- Ground for twisted pair return 31 PRIME Input Printer reset 32 FAULT Output Signal specifying printer error 33 GND --- Signal ground 34 NC --- Not used 35 FUSE --- Not used 36 SELECTIN Input Invalid (ignored)

(3) Parallel port status signals when an error occurs

The following table shows the status signal change when an error occurs. Under the specifications for this bi-directional parallel interface, the parallel port status signals when an error occurs are, as shown below, partially processed differently than with Compatible mode used up till now. When bi-directional parallel interface is on in the setting menu, even if a printer error has occurred, the BUSY signal line is not active ("H").

Error Compatible mode Paper end Busy:

PError: Select: Fault:

L → H L → H H → L H → L

Error other than paper end • Head open • Other

Busy: PError: Select: Fault:

L → H L→ unchanged H → L H → L

Conditions for Busy • Receive buffer full • Data being read • Error

Page 69: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-4. Interface

2-55 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

(4) Compatible timing specification (4) Compatible timing specification [When power is on] (Timing to go on-line) [When power is on] (Timing to go on-line)

BUSY

SELECT

Power On

ACK

Reset

[While receiving data] [While receiving data] Note: BUSY goes “High” at the falling edge of Strobe, and data is latched at the leading edge

of Strobe. Note: BUSY goes “High” at the falling edge of Strobe, and data is latched at the leading edge

of Strobe.

Data0~7

BUSY

0.5µs 0.5µs 0.5µs

Strobe

Page 70: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-4. Interface

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-56 56

[While receiving PRIME signal] [While receiving PRIME signal] Note: If the PRIME signal width is 10 µsec or less, it is not accepted.

BUSY goes to “High” when the PRIME signal is accepted by the printer. Note: If the PRIME signal width is 10 µsec or less, it is not accepted.

BUSY goes to “High” when the PRIME signal is accepted by the printer.

BUSY

PRIME

SELECT

10~15µsec or more

Ack

Fault

[Timing relationship between BUSY and ACK] [Timing relationship between BUSY and ACK]

About 2 µsec

BUSY

ACK

Center

Page 71: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-5. Power Supply

2-5. Power Supply

2-57 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

The power supply is a frequency-fixed reverse type switching regulator which outputs +5V and +24V DC. Power supply will be 120V AC type or 220-240V AC type. 2-5-1. Block diagram The following shows a block diagram for this power supply. For the circuit corresponding blocks A to E, refer to the circuit diagram on the following pages:

Block C Converter and driver circuit

Block D Output circuit

Block E Control circuit

Block B Current smoothing circuit

Block A Noise filter circuit and rush current preventing circuit

Page 72: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-5. Power Supply

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-58

BLO

CK

DB

LOC

K C

BLO

CK

B

BLO

CK

A

(120V type)

Page 73: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-5. Power Supply

2-59 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

BLO

CK

DB

LOC

K C

BLO

CK

B

BLO

CK

A

(220-240V type)

Page 74: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-5. Power Supply

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-60

2-5-2. Block A (Noise filter circuit and rush current preventing circuit) The filter circuit consists of the power switch (SW1) the fuse (F1), the X capacitors (C1, C2), the Y capacitors (C3, C4), the common mode choke coils (L1 and L2), the varistor (Z1), and the thermistor (R1). This circuit eliminates switching noise from the power supply to the main power line. Also, it eliminates noise from the main power line to the power supply to protect the power supply circuit. The thermistor R1 suppresses the rush current to the power supply circuit at power on. In continuous operation, the resistance of R1 is reduced as it is heated, reducing the power loss by R1. 2-5-3. Block B (Current smoothing circuit) This block consists of the bridge rectifier DS1, the smoothing capacitors C5-1 and C5-2, and resistors R8 and R10. <For 120V type> Half-wave rectification is performed by the bridge rectifier DS1 and the capacitor C5-1 and also by the bridge rectifier DS1 and the capacitor C5-2. Thus, the DC voltage across R8 and R10 (output of this circuit) becomes approx. 2.8-time of the AC input voltage. (It will be approx. 320V DC if the input voltage is 115V AC.) This DC voltage is supplied to the next converter and driver circuit. The choke coil L3 suppresses high frequency waves to meet the regulations against high frequency waves.

<For 200-240V type> Full-wave rectification is performed by the bridge rectifier DS1 and the capacitors C5-1 and C5-2. The DC output of this circuit will be approx. 1.4-time of the AC input voltage. (It will be approx. 320V DC if the input voltage is 230V AC.) This DC voltage is supplied to the next converter and driver circuit. The choke coil L3 suppresses high frequency waves to meet the regulations against high frequency waves. 2-5-4. Block C (Converter and driver circuit) (1) Converter circuit

The converter circuit operates with conducting-angle-controlled reverse method with frequency fixed. The rectified and smoothed voltage (e.g. 320V DC) is converted by the switching transformer T1 and then supplied to the secondary circuit. When Q1 is turned ON, 320V DC is applied to the primary winding N1 of T1. At this time, the voltage is induced in the secondary windings N3 and N4 and energy is charged in T1 since the energy flow to the secondary output circuit is blocked by the diodes DS2 and DS3. When Q1 is turned OFF, the energy polarity is reversed and the energy charged in the secondary windings N3 and N4 is discharged to the secondary output circuit through DS2 and DS3. Above operation is repeated and the energy is continuously fed to the secondary output circuit.

Page 75: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-5. Power Supply

2-61 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

The following circuit reduces the switching noise. So the output noise and the EMI (electromagnetic interference) noise are suppressed, and the reversal voltage applied to Q1, DS2 and DS3 is also reduced. • C13 and R25 connected between drain and source of Q1 / D1, C6, R7 and R5 connected to the primary winding N1 / C18, C21, R28, FB2 connected to DS3 / C29, C30, R26, FB1 connected to DS2

(2) Driver circuit The switching FET (Q1) is driven by the control IC (IC1). When power is turned ON, power is applied to pin 6 (VCC) of IC1 through R3 and R4. Then, the current starts to flow into the primary winding N2 and voltage is produced there. When the voltage at pin 6 (VCC) reaches approx. 16V DC, IC1 is activated and a pulse is output from pin 5 (OUT) of IC1 to drive Q1. When Q1 starts switching, approx. 20-25V DC is supplied from N2 to pin 6 (VCC) of IC1 to stably activate IC1. During stable oscillation, the switching pulse is continuously output from pin 5 (OUT) of IC1 to Q1 through R17, R18 and D3. The oscillation frequency is determined by R12 connected to pin 1 (RT), and the conduction-angle control is made by the control voltage fed from the secondary circuit to pin 2 (FB) of IC1. The following timing chart shows the control waveforms at various points.

0V

0V

0A

0A

0V

Vds of Q1

Pin 2 of IC1 (FB)

ID of Q1

Secondary current iflowing into DS2/DS3

Pin 5 of IC1 (OUT)

Vds: Voltage between the drain and source of Q1Id: Current flowing in the drain of Q1

Page 76: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

2-5. Power Supply

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 2-62

2-5-5. Block D (Output circuit) DS2, C15 and C16 perform half-wave rectification to produce +24V. DS3 and C19 perform half-wave rectification to produce DC voltage to supply to the +5V regulator IC (IC31). IC31 produces a stabilized +5V voltage. 2-5-6. Block E (Control circuit) The shunt regulator (IC32) and photo coupler (PI1) detect the output voltages (+24V and +5V) and feed the signal back to the primary side. R33, R34, R36 and VR1 are used to detect +24V and +5V outputs. The voltage produced by these resistors is compared with the reference voltage of IC32 (2.5V). If there is a difference between both voltages, the current flowing into the photo coupler PI1 is changed. So, the signal fed back to pin 2 (FB) of IC1 in the primary side is also changed. Then, the conduction-angle for Q1 is changed to stabilize +24V and +5V constant. <Over current protection circuit> The over current protection circuit detects the drain current of Q1 to check if power supply circuit is overloaded or its output is short-circuited. If over current is detected, IC1 cuts off the output signal from pin 5 (OUT) for protecting power supply circuit. The drain current (Id) of Q1 is detected by R23, R22, R21 and C11, and input to pin 3 (IS) of IC1. If the voltage at pin 3 (IS) exceeds the internal reference voltage (0.24V) of IC1, the switching pulse sent from pin 5 (OUT) is cut off, resulting in lower output voltage. If over current condition due to overloading or output short-circuit continuous, the voltage at pin 8 (CS) of IC1 increases, and after a certain period of time, the voltage will exceed the internal reference voltage (8.5V) of IC1. In this case, IC1 is latched to off mode and the output at pin 5 (OUT) is set to “Low” level (off condition). Then, the output voltages (+24V and +5V) is shut off. To recover the latched state, turn OFF the power and, after a while, turn it ON again. <Protection circuits in case of abnormality> In case of abnormality, the power supply circuit automatically stops its operation to avoid smoking or fire. When temperature of the power supply raises abnormally, the thermal fuse TF1 opens and the drive signal to Q1 is cut off. When the output voltage rises, the voltage across the primary winding N2 also proportionally raises. In this case, the Zener diode ZD1 is turned ON and the voltage higher than 8.5V is applied to pin 8 (CS) of IC1. Then, IC1 enters latch mode and stops its operation. To recover the latched state, turn OFF the power and, after a while, turn it ON again. If large current flows, the fuse (F1) in the noise filter circuit will be blown out.

Page 77: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE

3-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 78: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND MAINTENANCE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3-1. Maintenance Precautions .............................................................................................4 3-2. Cleaning .......................................................................................................................5 3-3. Lubrication ....................................................................................................................5

3-3-1 Lubrication frequency .......................................................................................5 3-3-2 Types of lubricant .............................................................................................5 3-3-3 Quantity of lubricant..........................................................................................5 3-3-4 Bond.................................................................................................................5

3-4. Maintenance Tools List .................................................................................................6 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication ...................................................................7

3-5-1. “SA, Top Cover Base” .......................................................................................7 3-5-2. Case U .............................................................................................................8

(1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way)............................................................................................8 (2) Removing the Case U after detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” .........................10

3-5-3. “SA, Fan” ..........................................................................................................11 3-5-4. Ribbon Gears ...................................................................................................12 3-5-5. “SA, Ribbon Motor F/R” and “SA, Ribbon PCB” ................................................13 3-5-6. “Catch, Ribbon Holder” and “Knob, Ribbon Unit” ..............................................14 3-5-7. “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” and “SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate” .........................15 3-5-8. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” and “SA, Tension Sensor” ..................................16 3-5-9. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” and “SA, Tension Sensor” ..................................17 3-5-10. Main PCB Block, “Unit, Power Supply” and “Unit, Control Panel” .....................19 3-5-11. “SA, Main PCB” ................................................................................................21 3-5-12. “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”........................................................................................22 3-5-13. “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L .........................................................................23 3-5-14. “SA, Platen” ......................................................................................................24 3-5-15. “Unit, Sensor U”................................................................................................25 3-5-16. “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB”, “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” and “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable” .......................................................................26

(1) “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB” and “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” .............26 (2) “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable” ..............................................................27

3-5-17. “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF”..........................................................................29 3-5-18. “SA, Head”........................................................................................................31

(1) Head SA block .........................................................................................31 (2) “SA, Head” ...............................................................................................33

3-5-19. “SA, Head Adjust” and “Cam, Head Balance” ...................................................35 3-5-20. “SA, Motor” .......................................................................................................36 3-5-21. “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” ............................................................................37 3-5-22. Gears ...............................................................................................................38 3-5-23. “Lever, Head Lock” and “SA, Main Plate R” ......................................................39 3-5-24. “Frame, Main”, “SA, Main Plate L” and “SA, Plate Peeler” ................................40

3-6. Adjustments..................................................................................................................41

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-2

Page 79: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6-1. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment..........................................41 (1) Sensor position adjustment (factory mode) ..............................................41 (2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (maintenance mode)..................................41

(2-1) Preparation..................................................................................41 (2-2) Adjustment procedures................................................................42

3-6-2. Ribbon Slant Elimination Adjustment ................................................................46 (1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (For user) ........................................46

(1-1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment for user (FRONT)................47 (1-2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment for user (REAR) ..................47

(2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (For service personnel)....................48 (2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel)................................................................48 (2-2) Ribbon guide position adjustment in the “SA, Head” (For service personnel)................................................................50

3-6-3. Ribbon Tension Adjustment..............................................................................53 3-6-4. Maintenance Information - Head Adjust Shim...................................................54

3-3 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 80: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-1. Maintenance Precautions

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-4

3-1. Maintenance Precautions WARNINGS

(1) Before starting disassembly/reassembly or mechanical adjustment, be sure to disconnect the power cord from the power source.

(2) Do not replace a fuse with the power switch turned on. (3) The fuse is provided to prevent fire, and damage to the “Unit, Power Supply”. When replacing it, use the same rating and type. (4) The main plug on this equipment must be used to disconnect main power.

Please ensure that the socket outlet is installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.

Observe the following in maintenance work:

CAUTIONS (1) Do not disassemble/reassemble or adjust the machine, if it functions properly. Particularly, do not loosen screws on any component, unless necessary. (2) After completing an inspection and before turning on the power, be sure to check that there

is no abnormality. (3) Never try to print without media. (4) Check that the media is properly set. (5) Do not lay anything on the cover or lean against it during maintenance or while the printer is

in operation. (6) During maintenance, be careful not to leave parts or screws unattached or loose inside the

printer. (7) When handling a printed circuit board, do not use gloves, etc., which can easily cause static

electricity. Since ICs, such as CPU, RAM and ROM, might be destroyed by static electricity, do not touch lead wires or windows unnecessarily.

(8) Do not put the printed circuit boards directly on the printer or on the floor. (9) When disassembling or reassembling, check wires for any damage and do not pinch or

damage them. Also, run wires as they were.

Page 81: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-2. Cleaning

3-2. Cleaning

,

3-5 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-3. Lubrication

Cleaning spots are listed below.

Cleaning Position Description Cabinet Wipe soiled parts of the printer with a clean dry cloth. Remove bits

of media, etc., using tweezers. Note: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch the equipment or to

bend parts, etc. Thermal head Clean the thermal head with the head cleaner only. Platen Clean the platen with a soft cloth. Media running surface (“SA, Platen”)

Wipe off media refuse, etc., on and around the media running surface.

Clean inside the printer in accordance with the following: • Cleaning frequency: Every 6 months or 300 hours of operation. (Whichever comes first) • Materials: Dry cloth (gauze or soft cloth) and thermal head cleaner

3-3. Lubrication 3-3-1 Lubrication frequency

This is a maintenance-free machine and requires no lubrication under normal use. However, the machine should be lubricated whenever it is disassembled and reassembled, or when lubricated parts are cleaned. The parts to be lubricated are indicated in the disassemble procedure with the mark .

3-3-2 Types of lubricant • Floil G-311S (by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) • Floil G-474C (by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)

3-3-3 Quantity of lubricant Small quantity.......... ............. About 1 drop. Ordinary quantity .... ......... About 3 to 4 drops. About 0.2 mm thick for grease. Large quantity.......... ....... Apply sufficiently.

3-3-4 Bond Threebond1401B

Page 82: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-4. Maintenance Tools List

3-4. Maintenance Tools List

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-6

Maintenance tools shown below are needed when replacing the maintenance parts such as the “SA, Main PCB”, “SA, Motor”, etc. Maintenance Tools List

No. Name Q'ty Description Remarks 1 Phillips Screwdriver

(Length 200 mm) 1 For 3~4 mm screws

2 Phillips Screwdriver (Length 100 mm)

1 For 2~3 mm screws

3 Flat-blade Screwdriver (Length 100 mm)

1 4.3 mm width

4 Box wrench 1 Box size: 5 mm 5 Tweezers 1 6 Round Nose Pliers 1 7 Cutting Nippers 1 8 Soldering Iron (30W) 1 9 Volt-ohm Meter 1

10 Spring Gauge 1 500g

Page 83: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication 3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-7 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

Caution: Forbidden screws on the “Unit, Ribbon”

DO NOT loosen or remove the following 10 screws. The “SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate” consists of three parts, and is assembled with 10 screws. If the “SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate” is disassembled, correct ribbon running cannot be assured. Namely, ribbon slant correction may become impossible within the adjustable range of the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear).

Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear)

Five screws

SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate

Five screws

DO NOT LOOSEN.

DO NOT LOOSEN.

3-5-1. “SA, Top Cover Base” 1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base” and remove it while opening its rear ends as shown in the

figure. 2. Remove the two Ribbon Holders and the Paper Holder block from the printer

SA, Top Cover Base

(Ribbon Holders)

(Paper holder block)

Page 84: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-8 8

3-5-2. Case U 3-5-2. Case U There are two ways to remove the Case U. There are two ways to remove the Case U. 1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way) 1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way) Procedure is long, but no adjustment is necessary when reassembling. Procedure is long, but no adjustment is necessary when reassembling. 2) Removing the Case U after detaching the “Unit, Ribbon”. (Readjustment is necessary.) 2) Removing the Case U after detaching the “Unit, Ribbon”. (Readjustment is necessary.) You can remove the Case U easily. However, once the “Unit, Ribbon” is detached, you need to You can remove the Case U easily. However, once the “Unit, Ribbon” is detached, you need to

perform ribbon slant elimination adjustment. (1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way)

1. Remove the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 2. Remove 4 screws (PH (N), M3x4) and detach the “SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan”, and then

disconnect 1 connector (J706) from the “SA, Ribbon PCB”. 3. Remove 4 screws (PH (N), M3x4) and detach the “Cover R, Ribbon Unit”. 4. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and detach the “Cover, Motor”. 5. Peel off the “Cap, Case U”. It is not reusable. 6. Remove 1 screw (PHT (PT), M3x14) and detach the “Cover, Connector Case U” Block. 7. Remove 1 screw (PHT (PT), M3x14) and detach the “Cover, Connector” from the “Cover,

Connector Case U”. 8. Remove 5 screws (PHT (PT), M3x14). 9. Release the “Lever, Head Lock” (blue color) to open the “Unit, Head-TT”, and then carefully

detach the Case U Block by lifting it upward.

Cover, Connector

Cover, Connector Case U

Cap, Casu U

PHT (PT), M3x14

SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan

BH (N), M3x6

Cover, Motor

Cover R, Ribbon Unit

PH (N), M3x4

PHT (PT), M3x14

PHT (PT), M3x14

PH (N), M3x4

Lever, Head Lock

(J706)

(Case U Block)

Page 85: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-9 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

10. Remove the “Cover, Front” from the Case U Block. 11. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and 1 nut (M3), and detach the “Damper, Top Cover” from

the Case U upwardly.

Damper, Top CoverBH (N), M3x6

Case U 621

Nut, M3 (NI)

Label, FCC ICES VCCI-ACover, Front

Notes on reassembling: • The “Cap, Case U” cannot be reused once it has been peeled off. • When assembling the “Damper, Top Cover”, tighten the screw while pushing down the

“Damper, Top Cover”.

Page 86: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-10

( 2) Removing the Case U after detaching the “Unit, Ribbon”

Caution: When the “Unit, Ribbon” is removed, you need to recheck if ribbon wrinkles appear or not. If ribbon wrinkles are found, correct them referring to “Removing Ribbon Wrinkle” on page 3-51. Normally, adjustment with the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear) will remove ribbon wrinkle.

1. Remove the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 2. Remove 2 screws (PH, M3x6) and detach the “Unit, Ribbon” by lifting it upward. At this time,

disconnect 1 connector (J702) from the “SA, Ribbon PCB”. 3. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and detach the “Cover, Motor”. 4. Remove 5 screws (PHT (PT), M3x14). 5. Release the “Lever, Head Lock” (blue color) to open the “Unit, Head-TT”, and then carefully

detach the Case U Block by lifting it upward.

BH (N), M3x6

Cover, Motor

PH, M3x6

Unit, Ribbon

PHT (PT), M3x14

(Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear))

(Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front))

(Case U Block)

(J702)

Lever, Head Lock

Page 87: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-11 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-3. “SA, Fan” 1. Remove the “SA, Top Cover Base” and the “SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan”. Refer to Steps 1 and 2 in

“3-5-2-(1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way)”. 2. Remove 4 screws (BHT (#2), M3x6 (NI)) and 4 washers (3x8x0.5), and detach the two

“Bracket, Ribbon Fan”. 3. Remove the “SA, Fan” and the “Cap, Ribbon Cover” from the “Cover L, Ribbon Unit”.

Bracket, Ribbon Fan

BHT (#2), M3x6 (NI)

Plain, 3x8x0.5

Cover L, Ribbon Unit

SA, Fan

Cap, Ribbon Cover

Page 88: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-12 12

3-5-4. Ribbon Gears 3-5-4. Ribbon Gears 1. Remove the “SA, Top Cover Base” and the “SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan”. Refer to Steps 1 and 2 in

“3-5-2-(1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way)”. 1. Remove the “SA, Top Cover Base” and the “SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan”. Refer to Steps 1 and 2 in

“3-5-2-(1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way)”. 2. On the front (ribbon take-up) side, remove 1 screw (NO. 0, THF, M2x3 (NI)) and 1 “Plate,

Ribbon Washer”. Then, remove the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring, Ribbon Return”, and “Gear 5F, Ribbon” in that order.

2. On the front (ribbon take-up) side, remove 1 screw (NO. 0, THF, M2x3 (NI)) and 1 “Plate, Ribbon Washer”. Then, remove the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring, Ribbon Return”, and “Gear 5F, Ribbon” in that order.

3. Also on the front side, disengage 1 E-ring and remove the “Gear 2, Ribbon”, “Gear 1, Ribbon”, “Gear 3, Ribbon”, and “Gear 4, Ribbon” in that order.

3. Also on the front side, disengage 1 E-ring and remove the “Gear 2, Ribbon”, “Gear 1, Ribbon”, “Gear 3, Ribbon”, and “Gear 4, Ribbon” in that order.

4. On the rear (ribbon supply) side, remove 1 screw (No. 0, THF, M2x3 (NI)) and 1 “Plate, Ribbon Washer”. Then, remove the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring, Ribbon Return”, and “Gear 5R, Ribbon” in that order.

4. On the rear (ribbon supply) side, remove 1 screw (No. 0, THF, M2x3 (NI)) and 1 “Plate, Ribbon Washer”. Then, remove the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, “Spring, Ribbon Return”, and “Gear 5R, Ribbon” in that order.

5. Also on the rear side, disengage 1 E-ring and remove the “Gear 2, Ribbon”, “Gear 1, Ribbon”, “Gear 3, Ribbon”, and “Gear 4, Ribbon” in that order.

5. Also on the rear side, disengage 1 E-ring and remove the “Gear 2, Ribbon”, “Gear 1, Ribbon”, “Gear 3, Ribbon”, and “Gear 4, Ribbon” in that order.

Notes on reassembling: Notes on reassembling: • Distinguish the “Gear 5F, Ribbon” from the “Gear 5R, Ribbon”, referring to the following figure. • Distinguish the “Gear 5F, Ribbon” from the “Gear 5R, Ribbon”, referring to the following figure.

Gear 5F, Ribbon Gear 5R, Ribbon

Projection

Plate, Ribbon Washer

Plate, Ribbon Washer

SA, Holder R Shaft

SA, Holder R Shaft

Spring, Ribbon Return

Spring, Ribbon Return

Gear 5R, Ribbon

Gear 5F, Ribbon

Gear 4, Ribbon

Gear 4, Ribbon

Gear 1, Ribbon

Gear 3, Ribbon

Gear 2, RibbonE-Ring, 4

Gear 1, Ribbon

Gear 2, Ribbon

Gear 3, RibbonE-Ring, 4

FLOIL G-474C

NO. 0, THF, M2x3 (NI)

NO. 0, THF, M2x3 (NI)

Page 89: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-13 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

• Assemble the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, the “Spring, Ribbon Return”, and “Gear 5F, Ribbon”/5R as follows:

• Assemble the “SA, Holder R Shaft”, the “Spring, Ribbon Return”, and “Gear 5F, Ribbon”/5R as follows:

Gear 5F, Ribbon/Gear 5R, Ribbon

Spring, Ribbon Return

SA, Holder R Shaft

• Apply FLOIL G-474C to the parts (gears and shafts) shown by the marks. 3-5-5. “SA, Ribbon Motor F/R” and “SA, Ribbon PCB” 1. Remove the “SA, Top Cover Base” and the “SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan”. Refer to Steps 1 and 2 in

“3-5-2-(1) Removing the Case U without detaching the “Unit, Ribbon” (Normal way)”. 2. Disconnect 1 connector (J702) from the “SA, Ribbon PCB”. 3. Remove 2 screws (PH, M2.6x3), disconnect 1 connector, and detach the “SA, Ribbon Motor

F”. 4. Remove 2 screws (PH, M2.6x3), disconnect 1 connector, and detach the “SA, Ribbon Motor

R”. 5. Remove 4 screws (BH, M3x6 (NI)), and detach the “SA, Ribbon PCB” and the Ribbon Board

Insulator.

Insulator, Ribbon Board PH, M2.6x3

SA, Ribbon Motor R

PH, M2.6x3

SA, Ribbon Motor F

SA, Ribbon PCB

BH, M3x6 (NI)

(J702)

Page 90: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-14

Note on reassembling: • When assembling the “SA, Ribbon Motor F” and the “SA, Ribbon Motor R”, tighten screws while

pushing the motor toward the “Gear 1, Ribbon”.

Front

Gear 1, Ribbon 3-5-6. “Catch, Ribbon Holder” and “Knob, Ribbon Unit” 1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 2. Remove 4 screws (BH, M3x3 (NI)) and detach the 2 “Catch, Ribbon Holder”. 3. Remove 2 screws (PHT (#2), M3x8 (NI)) and detach the “Knob, Ribbon Unit”.

BH, M3x3 (NI)

Knob, Ribbon Unit

Catch, Ribbon Holder

PHT (#2), M3x8 (NI)

Page 91: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-15 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-7. “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” and “SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate” Caution:

DO NOT disassemble the “SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate” that consists of three parts. If it is disassembled, correct ribbon running cannot be assured. Namely, ribbon slant correction may become impossible within the adjustable range of the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear).

1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 2. Remove 4 screws (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)) and detach the “Cover, Ribbon Tension Adjust” on

the front and rear sides. 3. Remove 2 screws (BH, M3x3 (NI)) and detach the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F”. 4. Remove 2 screws (BH, M3x3 (NI)) and detach the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R”. 5. Remove 2 screws (PH, M3x6) and detach the “SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate” from the “Unit,

Mechanism”.

Note on reassembling: • When assembling the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R”, perform “3-6-2 Ribbon Slant Elimination

Adjustment” on page 3-46.

(Unit, Ribbon Sensor F)

BH, M3x3 (NI)

Cover, Ribbon Tension Adjust

(Unit, Ribbon Sensor R)

BH, M3x3 (NI)

NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)

NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)

SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate

PH, M3x6DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.

Page 92: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-16 16

3-5-8. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” and “SA, Tension Sensor” 3-5-8. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” and “SA, Tension Sensor” Caution: Caution:

DO NOT disassemble the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” and tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4) unless you need to replace them. DO NOT disassemble the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” and tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4) unless you need to replace them.

1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 2. Remove the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F”. Refer to “3-5-7 “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R”“. 2. Remove the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F”. Refer to “3-5-7 “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R”“. 3. Remove 2 screws (NO.0, TFH (BT), M2x4 (NI)) at both ends, and detach the “SA, Ribbon

Tension Shaft F” and “Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller” (2 pcs.). 3. Remove 2 screws (NO.0, TFH (BT), M2x4 (NI)) at both ends, and detach the “SA, Ribbon

Tension Shaft F” and “Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller” (2 pcs.). 4. Peel off the “Sheet, Static Eliminator 621” from the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”. 4. Peel off the “Sheet, Static Eliminator 621” from the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”. 5. Remove 1 screw (PH (PW), M2x8), and detach the Tension Adjust Lever F Block and “Shaft,

Tension Adjust”. 5. Remove 1 screw (PH (PW), M2x8), and detach the Tension Adjust Lever F Block and “Shaft,

Tension Adjust”. 6. Remove the “SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever F” and “Spring F, Ribbon Tension” (2 pcs.) from the

“SA, Tension Adjust Lever F”. 6. Remove the “SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever F” and “Spring F, Ribbon Tension” (2 pcs.) from the

“SA, Tension Adjust Lever F”. 7. Remove the tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4) from the “SA, Tension Adjust Lever F”.

Note: Do not remove this tension adjust screw unless you need to replace it. 7. Remove the tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4) from the “SA, Tension Adjust Lever F”.

Note: Do not remove this tension adjust screw unless you need to replace it. 8. Remove 2 screws (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)) and detach the “SA, Tension Sensor”. 8. Remove 2 screws (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)) and detach the “SA, Tension Sensor”. 9. Remove 1 screw (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)), and detach the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” from the

“SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F”. Note: Do not remove the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” unless you need to replace it.

9. Remove 1 screw (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)), and detach the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” from the “SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F”. Note: Do not remove the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” unless you need to replace it.

Cam, Tension Base Adjust

Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller

Bush 2, Ribbon Guide RollerSA, Ribbon Tension Shaft FSheet, Static Eliminator 621

NO.0, TFH (BH), M2x4 (NI)

NO.0, TFH (BH), M2x4 (NI)

SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F

Spring F, Ribbon Tension

SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever F

SA, Tension Adjust Lever F

SA, TensionSensor

NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)

PH (PW), M2x8

PH, M1.7x4

Shaft, Tension Adjust

Page 93: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-17 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

Notes on reassembling: Notes on reassembling: • Distinguish the “Spring F, Ribbon Tension” (used here) and the “Spring R, Ribbon Tension” (used

in the next “3-5-9 “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R”“). They look like the same, but the number of turns differs.

• Distinguish the “Spring F, Ribbon Tension” (used here) and the “Spring R, Ribbon Tension” (used in the next “3-5-9 “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R”“). They look like the same, but the number of turns differs.

18 turns (Spring F, Ribbon Tension)

20 turns (Spring R, Ribbon Tension)

• When assembling the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”, adjust its position as shown in the figure to set it at the mechanical center. Then, perform adjustment according to “3-6-2-(2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel)” on page 3-48.

• When assembling the tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4), perform “3-6-3 Ribbon Tension

Adjustment” on page 3-53. 3-5-9. “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” and “SA, Tension Sensor” Caution:

DO NOT disassemble the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” and tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4) unless you need to replace them.

1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base”. Refer to “3-5-1 “SA, Top Cover Base”“. 2. Remove the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R”. Refer to “3-5-7 “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R”“. 3. Remove 2 screws (NO.0, TFH (BT), M2x4 (NI)) at both ends, and detach the “SA, Ribbon

Tension Shaft R” and “Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller” (2 pcs.). 4. Remove 1 screw (PH (PW), M2x8), and detach the Tension Adjust Lever R Block and “Shaft,

Tension Adjust”. 5. Remove the “SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever R” and “Spring R, Ribbon Tension” (2 pcs.) from the

“SA, Tension Adjust Lever R”. 6. Remove the tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4) from the “SA, Tension Adjust Lever R”.

Note: Do not remove this tension adjust screw unless you need to replace it. 7. Remove 2 screws (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)) and detach the “SA, Tension Sensor”. 8. Remove 1 screw (NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)), and detach the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” from the

“SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame R”. Note: Do not remove the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” unless you need to replace it.

Page 94: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-18 18

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R

NO.0, TFH (BH), M2x4 (NI)

NO.0, TFH (BH), M2x4 (NI)

SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame RSpring R, Ribbon Tension

SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever R

SA, Tension Adjust Lever R

SA, TensionSensor

PH (PW), M2x8

NO.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI)

Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller

Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller

Shaft, Tension Adjust

Cam, Tension Base Adjust

PH, M1.7x4

Notes on reassembling: Notes on reassembling: • Distinguish the “Spring R, Ribbon Tension” (used here) from the Ribbon Tension Spring F (used

in “3-5-8 “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”“). They look like the same, but the number of turns differs. • Distinguish the “Spring R, Ribbon Tension” (used here) from the Ribbon Tension Spring F (used

in “3-5-8 “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F”“). They look like the same, but the number of turns differs.

18 turns (Spring F, Ribbon Tension)

20 turns (Spring R, Ribbon Tension)

• When assembling the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”, adjust its position as shown in the figure to set it at the mechanical center. Then, perform adjustment according to “3-6-2-(2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel)” on page 3-48.

• When assembling the tension adjust screw (PH, M1.7x4), perform “3-6-3 Ribbon Tension

Adjustment” on page 3-53.

Page 95: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-19 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-10. Main PCB Block, “Unit, Power Supply” and “Unit, Control Panel” 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 2. Disconnect the following cables from the “SA, Main PCB”. • J3, J4, J5, J6, J7, J8, J9, J12, J13, J14

J7

J4

J3

J8

J6J5

J9

SA, Main PCB

J13

J12

J14To SA, Motor

To Unit, Power Supply

To SA, Ope-pane PCB

To SA, Head

To SA, Transparent Sensor PCBTo SA, Reflective Sensor PCB

To SA, Head Up Sensor

Front

To SA, Ribbon Main PCB

To SA, Ribbon Main PCB

To Unit, Centro PCB (Option)

3. Remove 4 screws (PHT (PT), M3x8), 1 screw (BH, M4x4 (NI)) and 1 washer (EXT. T, 4 (NI)),

and then detach the Main PCB Block upwardly. 4. Remove 3 screws (PHT (PT), M3x8), 1 screw (BH, M4x4 (NI)) and 1 washer (EXT. T, 4 (NI)),

and 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and 1 washer (EXT. T, 3 (NI)), disconnect the “SA, Power Cable”, and detach the “Unit, Power Supply”.

5. Remove the “Unit, Control Panel” upwardly by releasing the hook part. 6. Remove the “Cushion, Ope-pane Cable” and the “Cable, Ope-pane” from the “Unit, Control

Panel”. 7. Remove the “SA, Core” which is attached to the Case L.

Page 96: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-20

��� ���� ��

�� �� �� ����

�� � � � ���� �� �� ����

�����

������ ��������

�!�� ������� �����

����"#�

�$!�����

����"#�

�%&'!��� �������� �����

(����� $!�)*

�!�� ��)�� +%���,

���!� ��� ���"#�

+-� ��)�� �����

������ ��������

+-� ����

����#�

�� ��� ���.

�� � � � ��

�����

����

��

�����

-

-

Notes on reassembling: • When running the Ope-pane Cable, pass it inner side

of the case arms “A”. Main PCB Block

Cover, Head Wire(Media Guide End)

Unit, Mechanism Align.

• When connecting the flexible cables, be sure that the insertion direction is correct. If you insert it reversely, circuit is not electrically connected.

• When attaching the earth wire of the “Unit, Power Supply” to the “Unit, Mechanism”, be sure that the earth lug is assembled in the horizontal direction as shown in the figure.

• Media-path left-edge alignment: Assemble the “Unit, Mechanism” so that the media

guide end of the “Cover, Head Wire” is aligned with the chassis plate of the Main PCB Block as shown on the right.

Page 97: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-21 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

3-5-11. “SA, Main PCB” 3-5-11. “SA, Main PCB” 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 2. Remove the Main PCB Block. Refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block, “Unit, Power Supply” and

“Unit, Control Panel”“. 2. Remove the Main PCB Block. Refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block, “Unit, Power Supply” and

“Unit, Control Panel”“. 3. Disconnect the “SA, Centro Cable” from the “SA, Main PCB”. 3. Disconnect the “SA, Centro Cable” from the “SA, Main PCB”. 4. Remove the “Sheet 2, Main PCB” from the “SA, Main PCB”. 4. Remove the “Sheet 2, Main PCB” from the “SA, Main PCB”. 5. Remove 2 lock screws and 4 screws (PHT (ST#3), M3x5), and detach the “SA, Main PCB” and

the “Sheet, Main PCB” from the “Plate, Main PCB 621”. 5. Remove 2 lock screws and 4 screws (PHT (ST#3), M3x5), and detach the “SA, Main PCB” and

the “Sheet, Main PCB” from the “Plate, Main PCB 621”.

Plate, Main PCB 621

PHT (ST#3), M3x5Lock Screw

SA, Main PCB

Sheet, Main PCB

Sheet 2, Main PCB

SA, Centro Cable

Note on reassembling: Note on reassembling: • When the “SA, Main PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment.• When the “SA, Main PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment. Refer to

“3-6-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment” on page 3- . 41

Page 98: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-22

Note on installation of optional Parallel I/F board (“Unit, Centro PCB”): 1. Remove 2 screws (BHT (ST), M3x5) and 2 washers (EXT. T, 3), and detach the “Plate, Parallel

IF Cover” from the back side of the printer. 2. Take out the free end of the “SA, Centro Cable” from the inside of the printer and connect it to

the optional “Unit, Centro PCB”. 3. Assemble the “Unit, Centro PCB” to the place where the “Plate, Parallel IF Cover” was attached,

with the 2 screws and 2 washers removed in 1.

BHT (ST) , M3x5

EXT. T, 3

Plate, Parallel IF Cover

SA, Centro Cable

Unit, Centro PCB

J14Sheet 2, Main PCB

SA, Main PCB

3-5-12. “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” 3-5-12. “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 2. Remove the “Unit, Control Panel”. Refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block, “Unit, Power Supply” and

“Unit, Control Panel”“. 2. Remove the “Unit, Control Panel”. Refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block, “Unit, Power Supply” and

“Unit, Control Panel”“. 3. Remove 3 screws (PHT (PT), M3x6) and detach the “Cover, Ope-pane”. 3. Remove 3 screws (PHT (PT), M3x6) and detach the “Cover, Ope-pane”. 4. Remove the “Switch, Key” and the “LED, Window” from the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Remove the “Switch, Key” and the “LED, Window” from the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”.

Cover, Ope-Pane

SA, Ope-Pane PCB

PHT (PT), M3x6

Switch, Key

LED, Window

Plate, Main PCB 621Sheet, Main PCB

Page 99: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-23 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

3-5-13. “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L 3-5-13. “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 1. Remove the Case U Block. Refer to “3-5-2 Case U”. 2. Remove the Main PCB Block and “Unit, Power Supply”. Refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block,

“Unit, Power Supply” and “Unit, Control Panel”“. 2. Remove the Main PCB Block and “Unit, Power Supply”. Refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block,

“Unit, Power Supply” and “Unit, Control Panel”“. 3. Remove 4 screws (PHT (PT), M3x14) and detach the “Unit, Mechanism”. 3. Remove 4 screws (PHT (PT), M3x14) and detach the “Unit, Mechanism”. 4. Remove the “Sheet, Earth L”, “Sheet, Earth R”, “Plate, Earth” and 2 nuts (M4). 4. Remove the “Sheet, Earth L”, “Sheet, Earth R”, “Plate, Earth” and 2 nuts (M4). 5. Remove the “Cushion, Ope-pane Cover” from the Case L. (The Ope-pane Cover Cushion is

not reusable5. Remove the “Cushion, Ope-pane Cover” from the Case L. (The Ope-pane Cover Cushion is

not reusable.) 6. Remove the 2 “Leg, Case L F” and 2 “Leg, Case L R” from the Case L.

��� ����� ���

��� ���� �

��� ���� �

����� ���������

������ ����� ������ ����� �

� �� ��

����

�!���� �����

� ���"�� #$�%$���

�"&��

Notes on reassembling: • The “Cushion, Ope-pane Cover” that was removed in Step 5 is not reusable. • Run the cables as follows: Motor cable: Pass through left end (“A”). Other cables: Pass through the groove “B”.

Page 100: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-24

• Media-path left-edge alignment: Align the “Unit, Mechanism” so that the media guide end of the “Cover, Head Wire” is aligned

with the chassis plate of the Main PCB Block as shown below (refer to “3-5-10 Main PCB Block”).

3-5-14. “SA, Platen” 1. Open the “SA, Top Cover Base” and then the “Unit, Head-TT”. 2. While pushing the part “A” of the “SA, Platen”, lift the right end a little. (See the arrow “a”.)

Then, remove the “SA, Platen” from the “Unit, Mechanism” by moving it to the right and then lift it upwardly. (See the arrow “b”.)

Main PCB Block

Cover, Head Wire(Media Guide End)

Unit, Mechanism

Align.

��� ����

���� ������

���� ��� ���

Page 101: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-25 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-15. “Unit, Sensor U” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Open the “Unit, Head-TT” and detach the “Unit, Sensor U” to set it free. 3. Remove 4 screws (PH, M2x4), and detach the “Unit, Sensor U”.

����� ���� �

�� ����� ��� �� ����

����� ��� ���� ��� � !"��# �������

��

����� ����$%%�

&�� '��(

Notes on reassembling: • When assembling the “Unit, Sensor U”, be sure that the protrusions “A” and “B” are securely

engaged with the respective holes as shown in the figure. • When assembling the “Unit, Sensor U”, be sure that the cable length “C” is approx. 2.5 cm (1”)

with the “Unit, Head-TT” fully opened. If it is too long, the cable will be caught when the “Unit, Head-TT” is closed.

Page 102: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-26 26

3-5-16. “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB”, “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” and “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”

3-5-16. “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB”, “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” and “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”

(1) “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB” and “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” (1) “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB” and “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” 1. Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-5-15 “Unit, Sensor U”“. 1. Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-5-15 “Unit, Sensor U”“. 2. Remove the bonded “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB” from the “Cover, Head Wire” and

disconnect the “SA, Head Up Sensor Cable”. 2. Remove the bonded “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB” from the “Cover, Head Wire” and

disconnect the “SA, Head Up Sensor Cable”. 3. Remove 1 screw (NO.0 PHT (BT#1), M2x3) and detach the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB”

by disconnecting the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”.

3. Remove 1 screw (NO.0 PHT (BT#1), M2x3) and detach the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” by disconnecting the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”.

Notes on reassembling: Notes on reassembling:

SA, Transparent Sensor Cable

SA, Head Up Sensor PCBSA, Head Up Sensor Cable

SA, Transparent Sensor PCBNO.0 PHT (BT#1), M2x3

Cover, Head Wire

• When the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment. Refer to “3-6-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment” on page 3-41.

• When the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor adjustment. Refer to “3-6-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment” on page 3-

• When assembling the “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB”, bond it in place. • When assembling the “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB”, bond it in place. SA, Head Up Sensor PCB

41.

Page 103: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-27 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

(2) “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable” (2) “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable” 1. Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-5-15 “Unit, Sensor U”“. 1. Remove the “Unit, Sensor U”. Refer to “3-5-15 “Unit, Sensor U”“. 2. Remove the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB”. Refer to (1) as above. 2. Remove the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB”. Refer to (1) as above. 3. Remove 1 screw (PHT (PT), M2x8) ( ) and 1 washer (Plain, 2x5x03), and disengage the

“Unit, Sensor U” body from the “Cover, Head Wire” ( ). Then, remove the “Spring, Sensor Frame” ( ).

3. Remove 1 screw (PHT (PT), M2x8) ( ) and 1 washer (Plain, 2x5x03), and disengage the “Unit, Sensor U” body from the “Cover, Head Wire” ( ). Then, remove the “Spring, Sensor Frame” ( ).

4. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6) ( ) and detach the “Cap, Sensor Frame R” ( ). 4. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6) ( ) and detach the “Cap, Sensor Frame R” ( ). 5. Remove the “Cap, Sensor Cable U” ( ) to set the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable” free. 5. Remove the “Cap, Sensor Cable U” ( ) to set the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable” free. 6. Remove 2 screws (PH, M2.6x3) ( ) and detach the “Cap, Sensor Frame L” ( ). 6. Remove 2 screws (PH, M2.6x3) ( ) and detach the “Cap, Sensor Frame L” ( ). 7. Remove the “Holder, Sensor U” ( ) by sliding it to the right and detach the “SA,

Transparent Sensor Cable”. 7. Remove the “Holder, Sensor U” ( ) by sliding it to the right and detach the “SA,

Transparent Sensor Cable”. 8. Remove the”Plate, Friction SEN U” and “Spring, Friction SEN U” from the “Holder, Sensor

U”. 8. Remove the”Plate, Friction SEN U” and “Spring, Friction SEN U” from the “Holder, Sensor

U”. 9. Peel off the “Tape, Sensor Cable U” from the “Frame, Sensor Holder U”. 9. Peel off the “Tape, Sensor Cable U” from the “Frame, Sensor Holder U”.

8

1

3

4

5

7

6

92

Holder, Sensor U

Cap, Sensor Frame R

PH, M3x6

Frame, Sensor Holder U

SA, Transparent Sensor Cable

Cap, Sensor Cable U

PHT (PT), M2x8Plain, 2x5x03

Cap, Sensor Frame L

PH, M2.6x3

Spring, Sensor Frame

Cover, Head WireTape, Sensor Cable U

Spring, Friction SEN UPlate, Friction SEN U

Notes on reassembling: Notes on reassembling: • When assembling the “Spring, Friction SEN U”, securely engage it with the “Holder, Sensor

U” and cover it with the”Plate, Friction SEN U”. • When assembling the “Spring, Friction SEN U”, securely engage it with the “Holder, Sensor

U” and cover it with the”Plate, Friction SEN U”.

[Bottom View]

Holder, Sensor U

Spring, Friction SEN U

Plate, Friction SEN U

Page 104: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-28 28

• When assembling the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”, run it as shown below. Be sure that it passes 2 slits (“A” and “B”), and the free end is hooked on the protrusion and passes the slit “C”.

• When assembling the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”, run it as shown below. Be sure that it passes 2 slits (“A” and “B”), and the free end is hooked on the protrusion and passes the slit “C”.

SA, Transparent Sensor Cable

Slit "A"

Cap, Sensor Cable U

Protrusion

Slit "B"Slit "C"

[Bottom View]

• When assembling the “Cap, Sensor Cable U”, be sure that it is securely seated as shown

below: The notched corner should be engaged with the chassis securely. • When assembling the “Cap, Sensor Cable U”, be sure that it is securely seated as shown

below: The notched corner should be engaged with the chassis securely. SA, Transparent Sensor Cable

Cap, Sensor Cable U

Tape, Sensor Cable U • When assembling the “Holder, Sensor U”

body on the “Cover, Head Wire”, engage the “Spring, Sensor Frame” as follows.

D

Fixing the spring(Shorter slit)

Spring, Sensor Frame

Cap, Sensor Frame L

Cover, Head Wire

“Holder, Sensor U” body

Cable wire for pulling

1) Insert the long end of the spring into the shorter slit of the “Cover, Head Wire”.

2) Hook a cable wire or similar on the short end of the spring, and pull it to lower the short end of the spring.

3) While pulling the cable wire, assemble the “Holder, Sensor U” body on the “Cover, Head Wire”, and then hook the short end of the spring on the part “D” of the “Cap, Sensor Frame L”.

Page 105: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-29 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-17. “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x3) to detach the “Plate, Cable Guide” (1) from the “Unit,

Head-TT”. 3. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6) (2) to detach the earth lug from the frame. 4. Open the “Unit, Head-TT” and disengage the “Spring, Head Up” (3) and the “Spring 2, Head

Up” (4) from the “Unit, Mechanism”. Note: Hold the “Unit, Head-TT” as it can fall when the springs are removed. 5. Remove 1 screw (PH (SW+PW), M4x16) and the “Shaft, Head Holder” (5). 6. Disengage 1 E-ring (4) and detach the “Unit, Head-TT” (6) from the “Unit, PF” Block. 7. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and detach the “Bracket, Motor Cover” (7) from the “Unit,

PF” Block. 8. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and detach the “Hook, Head Up Spring 2” (8) from the “Unit,

PF”.

������� �� ���

������ �����

��� ���� �� ��

��� ����� �� ��

����� ��

�� �������� ����

���� �!�

"�#���� �

�$ �%&�� ���� '�(

����&� �� �� �� ��� �

$� �)�� �!�

*�� �+ ��

�� +� ���

$� �)�� �!�!,�- +� �� ��

����� +��

�,*., /�!���

�,*., /�!���

�,*., /�!���

������ '�0� /1�

$� �)�� �!�

�,*., /�!���

2

$

'

3

Notes on reassembling: • When assembling, apply G-311S to the following places shown by the mark.

A: Hole (front left). Circumference surface of the hole (on both sides) and inside the hole B: Hole and protrusion (rear left). Circumference surface of the hole (on both sides) and along

the protrusion surface. C: Along the contacting surface (rear left). D: 3 surfaces on the “Shaft, Head Holder”.

• When assembling the “Shaft, Head Holder”, be sure that its assembling direction is correct.

Page 106: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-30 30

• When assembling the “Spring, Head Up” (thin) and the “Spring 2, Head Up” (thick), first, hook them on the upper arms (“Unit, Head-TT”), and then on the lower arms (“Unit, PF”). In this case, hook the “Spring, Head Up” so that its opening ends come outward as shown in the figure. (This can prevent unwanted noise generation produced when the “Unit, Head-TT” is opened or closed, though this phenomenon rarely happens.)

• When assembling the “Spring, Head Up” (thin) and the “Spring 2, Head Up” (thick), first, hook them on the upper arms (“Unit, Head-TT”), and then on the lower arms (“Unit, PF”). In this case, hook the “Spring, Head Up” so that its opening ends come outward as shown in the figure. (This can prevent unwanted noise generation produced when the “Unit, Head-TT” is opened or closed, though this phenomenon rarely happens.)

Open ends of the “Spring, Head Up”

Spring 2, Head UpSpring, Head Up

Thin Thick

• When tying the Wire Tie on the lower side (not the Wire Tie on the upper side), wind it so that the

flat surface is inside. (This prevents the cable from being rubbed by the uneven (not flat) surface when the “Unit, Head-TT” is opened or closed.)

• When tying the Wire Tie on the lower side (not the Wire Tie on the upper side), wind it so that the flat surface is inside. (This prevents the cable from being rubbed by the uneven (not flat) surface when the “Unit, Head-TT” is opened or closed.)

(Flat)

(Not flat)

Cable

Page 107: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-31 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-18. “SA, Head” Caution: • Carefully handle the “SA, Head” when disassembling and reassembling it so as not to

damage the thermal elements of the “SA, Head”. Especially, avoid contacting the thermal elements with the metal part, etc.

The following shows the normal disassembly procedure of the “SA, Head”. For easier way, refer to “Tip” on page 3-34. (1) Head SA block

1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove the “Unit, Head-TT”. Refer to “3-5-17 “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF”“. 3. Place the “Unit, Head-TT” upside down as shown in the figure. 4. Remove 2 screws (PH, M3x6) and detach the “Guide, Head Cable”. 5. Set the media width adjustment dial and the media thickness adjustment dial to the location

“5” for easier removal. 6. While pressing down the Head SA block, move it forward and then to the left as shown by

the arrows. 7. Disconnect the connector from the Head SA block, remove 2 screws (PH, M3x3 and PH,

M3x6), and detach the “SA, Head Cable”.

��� ����

�� � � �� ����

����� � �����

��� � �� ����

��� ����

��� ����

���� � �� ������ �� ��� ����� ��� �� �� !���"

�� ��� ����#� ��� � �� !���"

$%$

$%$

�� �� �� ��&�#"

Page 108: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-32

Notes on reassembling: When assembling the Head SA block, follow the next steps: 1. Set the blue dials as follows: Media width adjustment dial: Location “0” (for easier assembling) Media thickness adjustment dial: Location “9” 2. Insert the end “A” of the Head SA block into the “SA, Head Adjust” ( ) and align its position

as shown in the figure ( ). (In this position, the screw “B” of the Head SA block can be correctly inserted into the slit “C” of the frame. If the screw “B” is not inserted into the slit “C”, the Head SA block cannot be correctly seated.)

3. While lightly pressing down the Head SA block ( ), move it toward the rear to hook its rear sides on the claws “D” of the frame ( ).

4. Set the media width adjustment dial to the location “5” to give tension to the Head SA block.

����� �� �� �

���� ���� ������������ ����� ���������� ����

������ ���� ���� ���������� ����

����

!

!

"#"

"$" �� "%"

��&���

����

��'� � � ����(

)*���

��� ���� ������

Page 109: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-33 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(2) “SA, Head” 1. Remove the Head SA block. Refer to “(1) Head SA block” as above. 2. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and detach the “SA, Head”. 3. Remove 2 “Bushing, Head”, 1 screw (PH, M3x8) and “Guard, Head Connector” from the

“Bracket, Head”. (The screw (PH, M3x8) is used for alignment purpose and not for mounting.)

� ��� ��

�� ����� �� � �������� �� �

�������� �� �

�� ��� �� � ���������

��� �� �

� �� � � �� !�"���

#���� � �� $�� ��%�&��

'� �( � �� $�� ��%�&��

�� )!*� ��&

Notes on reassembling: • When assembling the “SA, Head”, insert its 2 protrusions into the guide holes “E” for

aligning and then fix the “SA, Head” with 1 screw. • After assembling the “SA, Head”, clean the surface of the thermal elements with the head

cleaner. • After assembling the “SA, Head”, perform test print in self print mode to check the print

quality. (Refer to “2-3-2-(2-1) Self print mode”.) If the print quality is not enough, ribbon slanting or ribbon wrinkle may occur. In this case, perform “3-6-2 Ribbon Slant Elimination Adjustment” on page 3-46.

Page 110: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-34

Tip: To remove the “SA, Head” without disassembling the “Unit, Head-TT”

You can remove the “SA, Head” without disassembling the “Unit, Head-TT”. Though, the normal disassembly procedure is described in (1) “Head SA block” on page 3-31. 1. Raise the “Unit, Head-TT”. (The following figure omits the “Unit, Ribbon”.) 2. Disconnect the connector of the “SA, Head Cable” from the “SA, Head”. 3. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and detach the “SA, Head”.

SA, Head CableSA, Head

BH (N), M3x6

Page 111: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-35 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-19. “SA, Head Adjust” and “Cam, Head Balance” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove the “Unit, Head-TT”. Refer to “3-5-17 “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF”“. 3. Remove the Head SA block. Refer to “3-5-18 (1) Head SA block”. 4. Remove the “Spring, Head L” (short one) and the “Spring, Head R” (long one). 5. Remove the “Cam, Head Balance” as follows:

1) Set the “Cam, Head Balance” (media width adjustment dial) to the location “0” and remove the “Lever, Head Balance”.

2) Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6), and detach the “Cam, Head Balance” and the “Pivot, Head Balance Cam”.

6. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6), and detach the “SA, Head Adjust”. Note: The “Shim, Head Adjust” may be inserted for adjusting height, depending on the printer

to be used. It may be inserted at the factory to obtain correct adjustable range of the Media Thickness Adjustment Dial. (Reference information is written in “3-6-4 Maintenance Information - Head Adjust Shim” on page 3-54.) If the shim(s) is(are) inserted, assemble it(them) as it was(were).

7. Remove 1 screw (PH, M3x5) and detach the “Holder, Guide Sensor U” from the “SA, Head Holder Base”.

FLOIL G-311S

Spring, Head L (Short)

Spring, Head R (Long)

Lever, Head Balance

PH, M3x6

Pivot, Head Balance Cam

Cam, Head Balance(Media Width Adjustment Dial)

SA, Head Holder Base

PH, M3x6

Holder, Guide Sensor U

PH, M3x5

Label 2, Caution Head / Label, Caution Head

Label 7, Caution Head / Label 6, Caution Head

SA, Head Adjust

Shim, Head Adjust

May be assembledin some printers for height adjustment.

Note on reassembling: • When assembling, apply G-311S to the “Pivot, Head Balance Cam” surface.

Page 112: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-36 36

3-5-20. “SA, Motor” 3-5-20. “SA, Motor” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove 2 screws (PH, M3x3), and detach the Motor Block. Then, peel off the “Label 5,

Caution Head” from the “SA, Motor”. 2. Remove 2 screws (PH, M3x3), and detach the Motor Block. Then, peel off the “Label 5,

Caution Head” from the “SA, Motor”. Note on reassembling: Note on reassembling: • Once the “Label 5, Caution Head” has been removed, it cannot be reused• Once the “Label 5, Caution Head” has been removed, it cannot be reused.

(Unit, PF)

SA, Motor

PH, M3x3

Label 5, Caution Head

Page 113: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-37 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 1

3-5-21. “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” 3-5-21. “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. By accessing to the connector of the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable” from the bottom,

disconnect it from the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB”. 2. By accessing to the connector of the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable” from the bottom,

disconnect it from the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB”. 3. Open the “Unit, Head-TT”, remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6), and detach the “Holder, Guide Sensor

L”. 3. Open the “Unit, Head-TT”, remove 1 screw (PH, M3x6), and detach the “Holder, Guide Sensor

L”. 4. Slide the “Guide, Paper Set” to the left ( ) and remove the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” in the

direction shown by the arrow ( ), together with the “Guide, Paper Set” and “SA, Sensor Holder L”.

4. Slide the “Guide, Paper Set” to the left ( ) and remove the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” in the direction shown by the arrow ( ), together with the “Guide, Paper Set” and “SA, Sensor Holder L”.

5. Pull out the “Guide, Paper Set” from the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” and remove the “Spring, Friction PG” and the “Plate, Friction PG”.

5. Pull out the “Guide, Paper Set” from the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” and remove the “Spring, Friction PG” and the “Plate, Friction PG”.

6. Pull out the “SA, Sensor Holder L” from the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” and remove the “Spring, Friction SEN L” and the “Plate, Friction SEN L”.

6. Pull out the “SA, Sensor Holder L” from the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” and remove the “Spring, Friction SEN L” and the “Plate, Friction SEN L”.

7. Remove 1 screw (NO.0 PHT (BT#1), M2x3) and detach the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” from the “SA, Sensor Holder L”.

7. Remove 1 screw (NO.0 PHT (BT#1), M2x3) and detach the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” from the “SA, Sensor Holder L”.

8. Cut 2 Wire Ties and remove the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable”. 8. Cut 2 Wire Ties and remove the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable”.

PH, M3x6

Holder, Guide Sensor L

Guide, Paper Set

SA, Sensor Holder L

Shaft, Sensor Guide

SA, Reflective Sensor PCB

NO.0 PHT (BT#1), M2x3

SA, ReflectiveSensor Cable

Wire Ties

"A""B"

FLOIL G-311S

Spring, Friction PG

Plate, Friction PG

Spring, Friction SEN L

Plate, Friction SEN L

1

2

Notes on reassembling: Notes on reassembling: • When the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor • When the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” is replaced with new one, perform the sensor

adjustment. Refer to “3-6-1 Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment” on page 3- . 41• Apply Floil G-311S along the groove of the frame as shown.

Page 114: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-38

• Do not assemble the springs and plates wrongly. Spring, Friction PG: Large (approx. 7 mm in length) Spring, Friction SEN L: Small (approx. 5 mm in length) Plate, Friction PG: Wide Plate, Friction SEN L: Narrow

• Assemble the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” (with the “SA, Sensor Holder L” and the “Guide, Paper Set”), and align its ends in places. Next, securely assemble the “Holder, Guide Sensor L”. (The groove “A” of the “Holder, Guide Sensor L” should engage in the frame plate and also the protrusions should be inserted into the holes “B” on the frame.)

• When assembling the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable”, bind it with 2 Wire Ties as shown in the figure.

3-5-22. Gears 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove the “Unit, PF”. Refer to “3-5-17 “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF”“. 3. Remove the “SA, Motor”. Refer to “3-5-20 “SA, Motor”“. Tip: You can remove the gears without removing the “Unit, PF” and the “SA, Motor”. 4. Pull out the “Gear, PF2” by releasing its lock, and then pull out the “Gear, PF1” and the “Gear,

PF Idle”.

FLOIL G-311S

Gear, PF2

Gear, PF1

Gear, PF Idle

Notes on reassembling: • Apply Floil G-311S to each gear shaft (3 shafts) and to each gear surfaces. • The “Gear, PF Idle” has no directionality, but other gears have.

Page 115: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

3-39 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-5-23. “Lever, Head Lock” and “SA, Main Plate R” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove 2 screws (BH (N), M3x6), 2 washers (EXT. T, 3 (NI)) and 1 screw (PH, M3x6), and

detach the Main Plate R Block. 3. Disengage 1 E-Ring and detach the “Lever, Head Lock” and the “Spring, Head Lock” from the

“SA, Main Plate R”.

BH (N), M3x6

PH, M3x6

E-Ring, 2.5Lever, Head Lock

Spring, Head Lock

EXT. T, 3 (NI)

SA, Main Plate R

Note on reassembling: • When assembling the “Lever, Head Lock”, hook the “Spring, Head Lock” as shown. (One end is

inserted into the groove of the “Lever, Head Lock” and the other end into the hole.) Also, the “Lever, Head Lock” should be assembled on the “SA, Main Plate R” as shown in the figure.

Lever, Head Lock

Page 116: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-5. Disassembly, Reassembly and Lubrication

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-40 40

3-5-24. “Frame, Main”, “SA, Main Plate L” and “SA, Plate Peeler” 3-5-24. “Frame, Main”, “SA, Main Plate L” and “SA, Plate Peeler” 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 1. Remove the “Unit, Mechanism”. Refer to “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism” and Case L”. 2. Remove the “Unit, PF”. Refer to “3-5-17 “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF”“. 2. Remove the “Unit, PF”. Refer to “3-5-17 “Unit, Head-TT” and “Unit, PF”“. 3. Remove the “SA, Motor”. Refer to “3-5-20 “SA, Motor”“. 3. Remove the “SA, Motor”. Refer to “3-5-20 “SA, Motor”“. 4. Remove the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” (with the “SA, Sensor Holder L” and the “Guide, Paper Set”).

Refer to steps 1 to 4 in “3-5-21 “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB”“. 4. Remove the “Shaft, Sensor Guide” (with the “SA, Sensor Holder L” and the “Guide, Paper Set”).

Refer to steps 1 to 4 in “3-5-21 “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB”“. 5. Remove 3 gears. Refer to “3-5-22 Gears”. 5. Remove 3 gears. Refer to “3-5-22 Gears”. 6. Remove the Main Plate R Block. Refer to steps 1 and 2 in “3-5-23 “Lever, Head Lock” and “SA,

Main Plate R”“. 6. Remove the Main Plate R Block. Refer to steps 1 and 2 in “3-5-23 “Lever, Head Lock” and “SA,

Main Plate R”“. 7. Remove 2 screws (BH (N), M3x6), 2 washers (EXT. T, 3 (NI)) and 1 screw (NO.0, PH (#1),

M2.6x6), and detach the “Frame, Main”. 7. Remove 2 screws (BH (N), M3x6), 2 washers (EXT. T, 3 (NI)) and 1 screw (NO.0, PH (#1),

M2.6x6), and detach the “Frame, Main”. 8. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and 1 washer (EXT. T, 3 (NI)), and detach the “SA, Plate

Peeler” from the “SA, Main Plate L”. 8. Remove 1 screw (BH (N), M3x6) and 1 washer (EXT. T, 3 (NI)), and detach the “SA, Plate

Peeler” from the “SA, Main Plate L”.

Frame, Main

SA, Main Plate LBH (N), M3x6

NO.0, PH (#1), M2.6x6

SA, Plate Peeler

EXT. T, 3 (NI)

BH (N), M3x6EXT. T, 3 (NI)

Note on reassembling: • Media-path left-edge alignment when assembling the “SA,

Plate Peeler”: When assembling the “SA, Plate Peeler”, align the arrow mark on the “SA, Plate Peeler” with the media contacting surface of the “Cover, Head Wire” as shown. Also, when you stick a new Mark Label, align its arrow mark with the media contacting surface of the “Cover, Head Wire”. (When assembling the “Unit, Mechanism”, the media guide end of the “Cover, Head Wire” should be aligned with the chassis plate of the Main PCB Block (as explained in “3-5-13 “Unit, Mechanism”“). Then, the media-path left-edges are aligned on the basis of the Mark Label.

Cover, Head Wire (Media Guide End)

Mark Label

Main PCB Block(Media Guide End)

SA, Plate Peeler

Align.

Page 117: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-6. Adjustments

3-41 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-6-1. Transparent/Reflective Sensor Position Adjustment When you replace one of the following parts, perform both sensor position adjustment and sensor sensitivity adjustment. • SA, Main PCB • SA, Transparent Sensor PCB • SA, Reflective Sensor PCB (1) Sensor position adjustment (factory mode)

After entering Factory mode, adjust the following submenu items: • Through Sensor Position • Reflect Sensor Position For details, refer to “2-3-2-(3-3)-(a) Factory mode menu table”.

(2) Sensor sensitivity adjustment (maintenance mode)

In this adjustment, since the printer has not a display, PC is used instead. All operations will be done with the keys on the printer’s control panel. Communication between the printer and a PC is made through the serial port.

(2-1) Preparation

Before starting adjustment, prepare the following items: • Media (both label paper and tag) (recommended media or media you use) • RS-232C serial cable • PC which is installed Terminal software such as HyperTerminal and TeraTerm.

Windows normally comes with the HyperTerminal. If the software is not installed, you need to install it.

* Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Setting on the PC side: Make the following settings on the PC beforehand: 1. Connect the RS-232C serial cable between the printer and the PC. 2. On the PC, start the Terminal software. 3 Set the transmission conditions on the Terminal software so that they are identical to

those on the printer side. Default values of the printer: • Transmission speed (baud rate): 9,600 bps • Data length: 8 bits • Stop bit: 1 bit • Protocol: XON/XOFF

Page 118: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-42 631 3-42

Key operation on the printer: Key operation on the printer:

PAUSE STOPFEED

MODE/REPEAT

DOWN(Previous item / Decrease item)

EXIT

UP(Next item / Increase item)

SELECT

(2-2) Adjustment procedures (2-2) Adjustment procedures

Caution: Caution: • DO NOT adjust other menus not explained here. They are for factory setup use

and changing them will cause the printer to be defective. • DO NOT adjust other menus not explained here. They are for factory setup use

and changing them will cause the printer to be defective. Notes: Notes: • Do not turn OFF the power of the printer until you finish the adjustment. If it is turned

OFF, you need to repeat the adjustment from the beginning. • Do not turn OFF the power of the printer until you finish the adjustment. If it is turned

OFF, you need to repeat the adjustment from the beginning. • The value adjusted here is retained until you change it with the same procedure. Even if

you perform initialization in the “user menu setup mode”, it is not initialized. • The value adjusted here is retained until you change it with the same procedure. Even if

you perform initialization in the “user menu setup mode”, it is not initialized. 1. Turn on the PC and run the Terminal software. 1. Turn on the PC and run the Terminal software. 2. While pressing and holding the [MODE], [FEED] and [STOP] key, turn on the power. 2. While pressing and holding the [MODE], [FEED] and [STOP] key, turn on the power. ([MODE] + [FEED] + [STOP] + [POWER]) ([MODE] + [FEED] + [STOP] + [POWER]) 3. The following initial maintenance screen will appear on the PC. 3. The following initial maintenance screen will appear on the PC.

[Transparent sensor sensitivity adjustment, Media: Label paper] 4. Press the [FEED] key to select the transparent sensor menu (“Ini Thru Sensor”).

Page 119: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-43 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 S631

5. Peel off the label from liner (base) and set the liner part to the printer. Be sure that the normal adjustments for printing are correctly made. • Media sensor menu: “See Through” • Sensor positioning:

5. Peel off the label from liner (base) and set the liner part to the printer. Be sure that the normal adjustments for printing are correctly made. • Media sensor menu: “See Through” • Sensor positioning:

The upper sensor marker should meet the bottom sensor marker on the right side.

The upper sensor marker should meet the bottom sensor marker on the right side.

Tip: Tip:

Guide, Paper SetAligned

When you move the upper and bottom sensors to the right end (center of the printing mechanism), they match with each other for “See Through” position.

When you move the upper and bottom sensors to the right end (center of the printing mechanism), they match with each other for “See Through” position.

Also, when you push the “Guide, Paper Set” toward them in any poison, they match with each other as shown:

Also, when you push the “Guide, Paper Set” toward them in any poison, they match with each other as shown:

6. Press the [FEED] key to enter the transparent sensor adjustment mode. 6. Press the [FEED] key to enter the transparent sensor adjustment mode.

7. Press the [PAUSE] key to move the cursor to “Exec.”.

8. Press the [FEED] key to perform adjustment. Liner is automatically fed little by little and adjustment is performed. During adjustment, the following screen appears.

Page 120: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-44 631 3-44

When adjustment is successful, “Finished DAC XXX” is displayed. When adjustment is successful, “Finished DAC XXX” is displayed.

*The value “143” is one of samples. 9. Press any key on the control panel to store the adjusted value. Proceed to step 10 to perform reflective sensor adjustment. [When adjustment failed] When adjustment failed, “Cannot Setup” is displayed.

1) Press any key on the control panel to return to the screen in step 4. 2) Check the mechanical sensor positions, current Media sensor menu setting, label

paper, etc. and try again.

[Reflective sensor sensitivity adjustment, Media: Tag] 10. Press the [PAUSE] key to select the reflective sensor menu. “Ini Refl Sensor” screen will appear.

[PAUSE] key

11. Press the [FEED] key to enter the reflective sensor menu.

Page 121: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-45 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

12. Set tag with black marks, but avoid placing the black mark part on the reflective sensor. If you use continuous tag, set it to the printer.

Black mark Be sure that the normal adjustments for printing are correctly made.

• Media sensor menu: “Reflect”/”None” (for continuous paper) • Sensor positioning: The bottom sensor should meet the black mark position.

(However, avoid black mark.) 13. Press the [PAUSE] key to move the cursor to “Exec.”. 14. Press the [FEED] key to perform adjustment. Tag is automatically fed little by little and adjustment is performed. During adjustment, “Now!! Executing” appears. When adjustment is successful, “Finished DAC XXX” is displayed.

*The value “168” is one of samples. 15. Press any key on the control panel to store the adjusted value. Then, the screen returns to the one in step 10 and “Ini Refl Sensor” is displayed. 16. Turn OFF the power to terminate the adjustment.

Page 122: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-46

3-6-2. Ribbon Slant Elimination Adjustment There are two kinds of ribbon slant elimination adjustments: for user and service personnel. 1) For User

• Adjustment with the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear) 2) For Service Personnel

• “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” position adjustment: • Ribbon guide position adjustment (The ribbon guide is a part of “SA, Head”.)

Note: The general procedure how to remove ribbon wrinkles is explained on page 3-51. Refer to “Removing Ribbon Wrinkles” on that page.

(1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (For user)

As you turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear), the knob side (right side) of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” moves back and forth with the eccentric mechanism, and also, the knob side (right side) of the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” moves up and down. With this eccentric mechanism, ribbon running can be adjusted. Tip: The adjustment on the front side is more effective than that on the rear side.

Ribbon

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R

Unit, Ribbon Sensor RUnit, Ribbon Sensor F Ribbon Left-Right Balance

Adjustment Knob (Front)

Ribbon Left-Right BalanceAdjustment Knob (Rear)

SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F

SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame R

Page 123: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-47 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

(1-1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment for user (FRONT) This front side adjustment is required in the following cases: • Ribbon slant occurs, resulting in ribbon wrinkle. • “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F” is replaced or reassembled. 1. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front) to the center of the scale. 2. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) to the center of the scale. Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front)

Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear)

Ribbon

3. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) to remove ribbon wrinkle. 4. If ribbon slant is not removed yet, proceed to the next item, (1-2).

(1-2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment for user (REAR) This rear side adjustment is required in the following cases: • Ribbon slant occurs, resulting in ribbon wrinkle. • “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R” is replaced or reassembled. 1. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) and remove ribbon

wrinkle. 2. If ribbon slant is not removed, repeat above item, (1-1).

Page 124: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-48 631 3-48

(2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (For service personnel) (2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (For service personnel) (2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel) (2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel)

This adjustment is required in the following cases: This adjustment is required in the following cases: • If the parallelism reference for the user adjustable range needs to be changed. (This

adjustment will be required if ribbon wrinkle cannot be removed with the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear).)

• If the parallelism reference for the user adjustable range needs to be changed. (This adjustment will be required if ribbon wrinkle cannot be removed with the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear).)

• “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” is replaced or reassembled. • “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” is replaced or reassembled. By adjusting the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”, the parallelism of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” (movable part) against the Unit base (fixed part) is changed. The user adjustment using the Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear) is done based on the new parallelism reference.

By adjusting the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”, the parallelism of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” (movable part) against the Unit base (fixed part) is changed. The user adjustment using the Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear) is done based on the new parallelism reference. Note: The “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” is adjusted at the factory before shipping.

Therefore, it may be off-center when shipped. Note: The “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” is adjusted at the factory before shipping.

Therefore, it may be off-center when shipped. Adjustment procedure: Adjustment procedure: 1. Remove the Ribbon Tension Adjustment Cover from the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R”. 1. Remove the Ribbon Tension Adjustment Cover from the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R”. 2. Loosen2. Loosen 2 screws “A”. 3. Loosen the screw “B”, and turn the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” clockwise or

counterclockwise. The parallelism of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” against the base is changed.

4. Tighten screws “B” and “A” (2 pcs.).

A BSupporting point Unit, Ribbon Sensor F

Shifting the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F” (Viewing from the front side)

Shifting the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R” (Viewing from the rear side)

B

CW

Supporting point

Unit, Ribbon Sensor F

Base

Center CCW

CW Center CCW

Left side ribbon wrinkles cannot be eliminated by user adjustment.

Mechanical center Right side ribbon wrinkles cannot be eliminated by user adjustment.

A

Left*1 side ribbon wrinkles cannot be eliminated by user adjustment.

Mechanical center Right*1 side ribbon wrinkles cannot be eliminated by user adjustment.

A A

*1: Shows the direction viewing from the rear side.CW: ClockwiseCCW: Counterclockwise

Base (SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate)

Cam, Base Tension Adjust

Page 125: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-49 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Principle of operation of parallelism change with the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”: The parallelism of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” can be changed by means of the eccentric mechanism of the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”. The “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” has projections “a” and “b”. The projection “a” is inserted into the slotted hole “a’ “ on the base (fixed part), while the projection “b” is inserted into the hole “b’ “ on the “SA, Ribbon Tension Frame F/R” of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” (movable part). As you can see from the figure, the projection “a” is eccentric with respect to the projection “b”. Accordingly, as your turn the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust” (after loosening screws “A” (2 pcs.) and “B”), the eccentric projection “a” pushes the slotted hole “a’ “ so that the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” itself turns around the supporting point “c”. (The “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” turns in the same direction as you turn the “Cam, Tension Base Adjust”.)

[In the case of front side]

AB

a

a’

b’

c

c’

b

a’b’

SA, Ribbon Tension Frame F(movable part)

Cam,Tension Base Adjust

SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate (fixed part)

Page 126: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-50

(2-2) Ribbon guide position adjustment in the “SA, Head” (For service personnel) By shifting the ribbon guide shaft in the “SA, Head”, ribbon wrinkle on the front side can be corrected.

Adjustment procedure: 1. Loosen screws “C” and “D”. 2. Shift the left edge of the “Shaft, Ribbon Guide” back and forth to move the ribbon

contacting surface. Ribbon

C D (supporting point)

Shaft, Ribbon Guide

[Right side view]

[Top view]

Page 127: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-51 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Removing Ribbon Wrinkles

T

he following explains the general procedure for removing ribbon wrinkles.

Adjusting points: • Ribbon tension • Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) - Ribbon slant • Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) - Ribbon slant • Ribbon Guide Shaft (a part of the “SA, Head”) - Ribbon slant How to check ribbon wrinkles: • Visual check Adjustment procedure: First, adjust the ribbon tension and then the ribbon paths (front/rear) to remove ribbon wrinkles. (1) Ribbon Tension Adjustment

1. Adjust the ribbon tension on the front and rear sides to obtain the specified value. Refer to “3-6-3 Ribbon Tension Adjustment”.

2. Proceed to the next item, (2). (2) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment

Ribbon is fed from the supply side and taken up on the take-up side via the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R” of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor R” and the “SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F” of the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F”. (See the figure on the next page.) 1. Adjust the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) and then the Ribbon

Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) to remove ribbon wrinkle. Refer to “3-6-2-(1) Ribbon slant elimination adjustment (For user)”.

2. If satisfactory results are not obtained, the following adjustments will be required. • “3-6-2-(2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel)”.

• “3-6-2-(2-2) Ribbon guide position adjustment in the “SA, Head” (For service personnel)”. (2-1) Visual check and adjustment

Checking the ribbon surface visually is a good way to see whether the ribbon wrinkles or not. You can find wrinkles by the reflected light on the ribbon surface. Check both take-up side and supply sides of ribbon. (See the figure on the next page to find the places where wrinkles may appear.) Note: For removing wrinkles, front side adjustment is more effective than the rear side

one.

1. Perform test print in self print mode. (Refer to “2-3-2-(2-1) Self print mode”.) 2. Visually check the take-up side for ribbon wrinkles.

Since ribbon is taken up stronger on the shorter ribbon path side, wrinkles appear on the longer path side. During printing the self print patterns, check wrinkles and correct the ribbon travel as follows: • If wrinkles are found on the left side (“a” in the figure), turn the Ribbon Left-Right

Balance Adjustment Knob (Front) clockwise. • If wrinkles are found on the right side (“a’ “ in the figure), turn the knob

counterclockwise.

Page 128: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-52

• If wrinkles are found at around center, find the side (either front or rear) and turn the knob accordingly.

3. Visually check on the supply side for ribbon wrinkles. Since ribbon is pulled stronger on the shorter ribbon path side, wrinkles appear on the longer path side. During printing the self print patterns, check wrinkles and correct ribbon travel as follow: • If wrinkles are found on the left side (“b” in the figure), turn the Ribbon Left-Right

Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) counterclockwise. • If wrinkles are found on the right side (“b’ “ in the figure), turn the knob clockwise. • If wrinkles are found at around center, find the side (either front or rear) and turn the

knob accordingly. 4. Be sure that the adjusted positions in Steps 2 and 3 are at around the center of scales,

respectively. Note 1: If they are off-center widely or wrinkles cannot be removed, the “Cam,

Tension Base Adjust” position may be wrong. Perform “3-6-2-(2-1) Tension base adjust cam position adjustment (For service personnel)”.

Note 2: To remove ribbon wrinkles on the front side, the ribbon guide position is adjustable. Refer to “3-6-2-(2-2) Ribbon guide position adjustment in the “SA, Head” (For service personnel)”.

A

A’

B

B’

AA’

B

B’

b

a’

b’

aRibbon

SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft FSA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R

(Unit, Ribbon Sensor R)(Unit, Ribbon Sensor F)

Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Front)

Ribbon Left-Right BalanceAdjustment Knob (Rear)

(2-2) Readjustment of ribbon tension

If satisfactory results are not obtained yet, readjustment of ribbon tension is required. Repeat from “(1) Ribbon Tension Adjustment” on the previous page.

Page 129: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

3-53 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

3-6-3. Ribbon Tension Adjustment This adjustment should be done in the following cases: • When ribbon running is abnormal. • When the “Unit, Ribbon Sensor F/R” or one of its parts is reassembled. 1. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knobs (Front) to the center of the scale. 2. Turn the Ribbon Left-Right Balance Adjustment Knob (Rear) to the center of the scale. 3. Set the Tension Adjustment Knobs (Front/Rear) to the positions marked with (Max. tension). 4. Remove the “Cover, Ribbon Tension Adjust” on the front and rear sides for checking the

lighting status of LED (D901). 5. Turn ON the printer. 6. Place the spring gauge on the front side knob as shown in the figure and apply 350 to 380g

force onto the knob. At this time, be sure that the LED changes from ON to OFF. 7. Place the spring gauge on the rear side knob as shown in the figure and apply 350 to 400g

force onto the knob. At this time, be sure that the LED changes from ON to OFF. 8. If satisfactory results are obtained, turn OFF the printer.

If not, proceed to Step 9.

D901

D901

350 - 400g

350 - 380g

Tension Adjustment Knob(Front)

Tension Adjustment Knob (Rear)

Front Balance Adjustment Knob(Center)

Back Balance Adjustment Knob(Center)

SA, Tension Sensor

(Unit, Ribbon Sensor R)

(Unit, Ribbon Sensor F)

Strong

Weak

StrongWeak

Page 130: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

3-6. Adjustments

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 3-54 631 3-54

9. While inserting a small screwdriver into the tension adjust screw through the hole, adjust the screw so that the LED changes from OFF to ON when the following tension is applied to the knob:

9. While inserting a small screwdriver into the tension adjust screw through the hole, adjust the screw so that the LED changes from OFF to ON when the following tension is applied to the knob:

Front (take-up) side: 350 to 380g Rear (supply) side: 350 to 400g Note: After adjustment, apply Threebond 1401B to the screw to fix it.

Front (take-up) side: 350 to 380g Rear (supply) side: 350 to 400g Note: After adjustment, apply Threebond 1401B to the screw to fix it.

Front Tension Adjustment ScrewApply Threebond 1401B.

Back Tension Adjustment ScrewApply Threebond 1401B.

10. After completion of adjustment, turn OFF the printer. 3-6-4. Maintenance Information - Head Adjust Shim Depending on the printer, the “Shim, Head Adjust” may be added at the factory to obtain correct adjustable range of the Media Thickness Adjustment Dial. At the factory, the following adjustment is performed: Note: This adjustment is not required for service work normally. 1. A line is printed with the Media Thickness

Adjustment Dial set to “0”. 2. If the line is faint, one or more “Shim, Head

Adjust” will be added.

[OK]

[NG]

SA, Head Adjust

(Media Thickness Adjustment Dial)

Shim, Head Adjust

Page 131: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING

4-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 132: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING

TABLE OF CONTENTS 4-1. ..........................................................................4-3 Error Message and Corrective Actions4-2. ............................................................................................................4-5 Troubleshooting

4-2-1. ................................................................4-5 Problems in Powering Up the Printer4-2-2. Media-feed Problems........................................................................................4-6 4-2-3. .........................................................................................4-7 Problems in Printing4-2-4. ........................................................................................4-8 Ribbon-feed Problem4-2-5. ..............................................................................................4-10 Sensor Problems4-2-6. ................................................................................4-12 Operation Panel Problems4-2-7. ..........................................................................................4-13 Connector Location

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 4-2

Page 133: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions

4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions

4-3 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

When an error occurs, the error condition will be displayed on the operation panel. The LEDs on the control panel blink to tell you the error contents. In case of error (except for abnormal head/motor temperature), the printer enters off line and the PRINT LED goes out.

Causes/Corrective Actions PRINT LED CONDITION LED ERROR LED

Head open • Close the head.

OFF OFF OFF

ON

Media end • Add media.

OFF OFF OFF

ON

Media out (Media not detected) • Incorrect sensor positioning:

Correct the sensor position to match the sensor position with the label/tag’s black mark.

• Incorrect Media mode menu:

Match the Media mode menu (e.g. SeeThrough) and media to be used.

OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

• Incorrect sensor adjustment

against media to be used: Enter sensor adjustment mode

([PAUSE]+[FEED]+[STOP]+ [POWER]), and perform sensor adjustment.

Abnormal ribbon feed OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF

Ribbon out (Ribbon end) OFF

ON OFF ON

OFF Abnormal head temperature

• Printing will temporarily stop. Wait until the thermal head gets cool.

OFF

OFF

ON OFF

ON

Page 134: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-1. Error Message and Corrective Actions

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 4-4

Causes/Corrective Actions PRINT LED CONDITION LED ERROR LED

Abnormal PF motor or Ribbon Motor F temperature

• Printing will temporarily stop. Wait until the motor gets cool.

Abnormal auto cutter temperature (Optional)

OFF

OFF

ON OFF

ON

• Printing will temporarily stop. Wait until the auto cutter gets cool.

Abnormal head resistance • Due to defective thermal

element: OFF

OFF

ON OFF

ON

Printing quality will degrade.

Communication error • Reception buffer overrun OFF OFF

OFF

ON • Parity or framing error

• Transmission buffer overflow Auto cutter abnormality (Optional) • Jamming, etc.

OFF OFF OFF

ON

Page 135: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

4-2. Troubleshooting

4-5 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

The following tables show possible remedies for various symptoms that might occur. Symptoms are given in the left column, and the corresponding remedies in the right column. Notes: 1. When parts are replaced, refer to Chapter 3 "Disassembly and Maintenance". 2. Connectors (J . . .) given in the column of checks and remedies are connected with the

“SA, Main PCB”. For the location of each connector, refer to “4-2-7 Connector Location".

4-2-1. Problems in Powering Up the Printer

Symptoms Checks Remedies No power to the printer

1. Check voltage on the input power line. Acceptable supply voltage: 120V (-10%+6%) for 120V version 220V-240V (-10%+6%) for 220V version

2. Is the fuse F1 on the “Unit, Power

Supply” blown? 3. Is the “SA, Power Cable” firmly

connected between the “Unit, Power Supply” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J9)?

4. Is the Ope-pane Cable connected

between the “SA, Main PCB” (J7) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly? If it is not connect or is inserted upside down, no LED lights even if you turned ON the power.

5. Failure in the power supply circuit.

1. Supply correct voltage. 2. Replace with new fuse. If new fuse

is also blown when power is turned on with the connector J9 disconnected from the “SA, Main PCB”, the “Unit, Power Supply” is faulty and must be replaced.

Notes: - Do not replace the fuse with the power switch turned on.

- The fuse is provided to prevent fire, and damage to the “Unit, Power Supply”. When replacing it, use the same rating and type.

3. Connect it firmly. 4. Connect it firmly. 5. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.

Page 136: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 4-6 1 4-6

4-2-2. Media-feed Problems 4-2-2. Media-feed Problems

Symptoms Checks Remedies No media feed 1. Is the connector J4 for PF motor

connected firmly? 1. Re-connect it firmly.

2. Is the connector J9 for “Unit, Power

Supply” connected firmly? 2. Re-connect it firmly.

3. Is +24V supplied to the “SA, Main PCB”

(at pins 6, 7 and 8 of J9)?

3. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.

4. Failure in the control circuit or in the

paper feed motor driver. 5. Does the PF motor work?

4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”. 5. Replace the “SA, Motor”.

To Power Supply Unit

J9SA, Main PCB

81

[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]

Irregular media feed pitch

1. Is the connector J4 for PF motor connected firmly?

1. Re-connect it firmly.

2. Is dust or other foreign matter on the

platen? 2. Remove dust or foreign matter.

3. Does the media feed mechanism work

smoothly? 3. Check, clean and lubricate

mechanical parts. Note: Refer to Chap. 3

"Disassembly and Maintenance".

4. Failure in the control circuit or in the

paper feed motor driver. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

Media jamming 1. Is media set correctly? 1. Set media correctly.

2. Is the media being used within

manufacturer's specifications? 2. Use media within manufacturer's

specifications. 3. Check the media feed mechanism and

media path for dust or other foreign matter.

3. Remove dust or foreign matter.

Page 137: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

4-7 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 631

4-2-3. Problems in Printing 4-2-3. Problems in Printing

Symptoms Checks Remedies No print 1. Is the head block securely closed? 1. Close the head block correctly. 2. Is the thermal head over heated? 2. Wait until the thermal head gets

cool. Printing resumes automatically.

3. Is the PF motor over heated? 3. Wait until the PF motor gets cool. Printing resumes automatically. 4. Is the take-up side ribbon motor (“SA,

Ribbon Motor F”) over heated? 4. Wait until the “SA, Ribbon Motor F”

gets cool. Printing resumes automatically.

5. Is the interface cable firmly connected

between the printer and the host? 5. Connect it firmly.

6. Is the print head cable firmly connected

between the “SA, Head” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J3)?

6. Connect it firmly. 7. Does the transparent/reflective sensor

detect presence of media? 7. To check, see “4-2-5 Sensor

Problems". 8. Is +24V supplied to the “SA, Main PCB”

(at pins 6, 7 and 8 of J9)?

8. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.

9. “SA, Head” is broken. 10. Failure in the head driver circuit. 11. Failure in the control circuit.

9. Replace the “SA, Head”. 10. Replace the “SA, Head”. 11. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

To Power Supply Unit

J9SA, Main PCB

81

[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]

Page 138: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 4-8

Symptoms Checks Remedies

Poor printing

1. Thickness adjustment is improper. 1. Adjust the media thickness adjustment dial to suit to the media thickness being used.

2. Is +24V supplied to the “SA, Main PCB”

(at pins 6, 7 and 8 of J9)?

2. Replace the “Unit, Power Supply”.

To Power Supply Unit

J9SA, Main PCB

81

[Bottom right of the “SA, Main PCB”]

Uneven print density 1. Head balance is improper. 1. Adjust the media width adjustment dial to suit to the media width being used.

Uneven print density may appear either on the right side or the left side.

4-2-4. Ribbon-feed Problem

Symptoms Checks Remedies Ribbon is not fed at all, or is not fed correctly.

1. Is the ribbon correctly inserted into the ribbon holders?

1. Insert the ribbon correctly.

2. Is the ribbon path correct? 2. Install the ribbon correctly. 3. Is the cable connected between J12/J13

on the “SA, Main PCB” and J702 on the “SA, Ribbon PCB” firmly?

3. Connect it firmly.

4. Is the cable connected between J701 on

the “SA, Ribbon PCB” and the “SA, Ribbon Motor F” firmly?

4. Connect it firmly.

5. Is the cable connected between J705 on

the “SA, Ribbon PCB” and the “SA, Ribbon Motor R” firmly?

5. Connect it firmly.

6. Does the ribbon cooling fan work

correctly for cooling the ribbon motors? If not, check if the cable of the “SA, Fan” firmly connected to the “SA, Ribbon PCB” (J706).

6. Connect the cable firmly.

7. Do the ribbon sensors on the take-up

and supply sides work correctly? See “4-2-5 Sensor Problems”.

7. Replace the “SA, Tension Sensor”.

Page 139: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

4-9 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Symptoms Checks Remedies Ribbon is not fed at all, or is not fed correctly.

8. Do the ribbon drive gears work correctly?

9. Does the Ribbon Motor F/R work

correctly? 10. Failure in the ribbon motor drive circuit. 11. Failure in the ribbon motor control

circuit.

8. Replace the defective ribbon gear. 9. Replace the “SA, Ribbon Motor F”

or “SA, Ribbon Motor R”. 10. Replace the “SA, Ribbon PCB”. 11. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

Ribbon slants.

1. Is the ribbon correctly inserted into the ribbon holders?

2. Is the ribbon path correct? 3. Is the ribbon slant elimination

adjustment made?

1. Insert the ribbon correctly. 2. Install the ribbon correctly. 3. Adjust it according to 3-6-2 “Ribbon

Slant Elimination Adjustment”.

Page 140: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 4-10

4-2-5. Sensor Problems

Symptoms Checks Remedies Head block is closed, but head open error is indicated by LEDs. (Head up sensor problem)

1. Is the “SA, Head Up Sensor Cable” firmly connected between the “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J8)?

2. Is the protrusion (metal end) inserted

into the photointerrupter of the “SA, Head Up Sensor PCB”?

3. Failure in the control circuit.

1. Connect it firmly. 2. Replace the “SA, Head Up Sensor

PCB”. 3. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

Ribbon tension is not correctly controlled. (Tension sensor F/R problem)

1. Is the cable firmly connected between the “SA, Tension Sensor” on the take-up side and the “SA, Ribbon PCB” (J703)?

2. Is the cable firmly connected between

the “SA, Tension Sensor” on the supply side and the “SA, Ribbon PCB” (J704)?

3. Is the tension value in the specified

range? 4. Does the ribbon sensor F/R work

correctly? Remove the ribbon, and push and

release the “Unit, Ribbon Senor F/R” with your finger tip to see if the LED of the “SA, Tension Sensor” turns ON and OFF. (Remove the Ribbon Tension Adjustment Cover to see LED.)

5. Failure in the control circuit.

1. Connect it firmly. 2. Connect it firmly. 3. Adjust tension according to 3-6-3

“Ribbon Tension Adjustment”. 4. Replace the “SA, Tension Sensor”

on the take-up/supply side. For the location of LED, see “3-6-3 Ribbon Tension Adjustment”.

5. Replace the “SA, Ribbon PCB” or

the “SA, Main PCB”.

Page 141: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

4-11 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Symptoms Checks Remedies

Ribbon end is not correctly detected. (Tension sensor R problem)

1. Is the cable firmly connected between the “SA, Tension Sensor” on the supply side and the “SA, Ribbon PCB” (J704)?

2. Does the ribbon sensor R work

correctly? Remove the ribbon, and push and release the “Unit, Ribbon Senor R” on the rear side with your finger tip to see if the LED of the “SA, Tension Sensor” turns ON and OFF. (Remove the Ribbon Tension Adjustment Cover to see LED.)

3. Failure in the control circuit.

1. Connect it firmly. 2. Replace the “SA, Tension Sensor”

on the supply side. For the location of LED, see “3-6-3 Ribbon Tension Adjustment”.

3. Replace the “SA, Ribbon PCB” or

the “SA, Main PCB”.

Label on liner or notch of tag is not detected. (Transparent sensor problem) Or Paper end is not detected.

1. Is the Media Sensor menu setting correct?

2. Does the Transparent Sensor marker

match with the bottom sensor (Reflective Sensor) marker?

3. Is the sensor adjustment is performed

against media to be used? 4. Is the “SA, Transparent Sensor Cable”

firmly connected between the “SA, Transparent Sensor PCB” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J6)?

5. Is the transparent sensor cable (flexible

cable) inserted correctly (not upside down)?

6. Is the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable”

firmly connected between the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J5)?

7. Is dust on the LEDs of the Reflective

Sensor? 8. Failure in the Transparent Sensor or the

Reflective Sensor. 9 . Failure in the control circuit.

1. Set it to “See Through”. 2. Move both sensors to align their

positions for transparent use. 3. Perform the sensor adjustment.

See “2-3-2 (1-1) Sensor Adjustment mode”.

4. Connect it firmly. 5. Insert it in the correct direction. 6. Connect it firmly. 7. Clean the LEDs to remove dust. 8. Replace the “SA, Transparent

Sensor PCB” or the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB”.

9. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

Page 142: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 4-12

Symptoms Checks Remedies

Black mark on tag is not detected. (Reflective sensor problem) Or Paper end is not detected.

1. Is the Media Sensor menu correct? 2. Does the Reflective Sensor match with

the black mark? 3. Is the sensor adjustment is performed

against media to be used? 4. Is the “SA, Reflective Sensor Cable”

firmly connected between the “SA, Reflective Sensor PCB” and the “SA, Main PCB” (J5)?

5. Is dust on the LEDs or photo transistor

of the Reflective Sensor? 6. Failure in the Reflective Sensor. 7. Failure in the control circuit.

1. Set it to “Reflect”. 2. Move the sensor in the center of

black mark. 3. Perform the sensor adjustment.

See “2-3-2 (1-1) Sensor Adjustment mode”.

4. Connect it firmly. 5. Clean the LEDs to remove dust. 6. Replace the “SA, Reflective Sensor

PCB”. 7. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

4-2-6. Operation Panel Problems

Symptoms Checks Remedies Nothing is displayed on the LED.

1. Is the Ope-pane Cable connected between the “SA, Main PCB” (J7) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly?

2. Is the Ope-pane Cable inserted upside

down? 3. Failure in the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Failure in the control circuit.

1. Connect it firmly. 2. Insert it in the correct direction. 3. Replace the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

No key works.

1. Is the Ope-pane Cable connected between the “SA, Main PCB” (J7) and the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB” firmly?

2. Is the Ope-pane Cable inserted upside

down? 3. Failure in the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Failure in the control circuit.

1. Connect it firmly. 2. Insert it in the correct direction. 3. Replace the “SA, Ope-Pane PCB”. 4. Replace the “SA, Main PCB”.

Page 143: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

4-2. Troubleshooting

4-13 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

4-2-7. Connector Location [SA, Main PCB]

J7

J4

J3

J8

J6J5

J9

SA, Main PCB

J13

J12

J14

To SA, Motor

To Unit, Power Supply

To SA, Ope-pane PCB

To SA, Head

To SA, Transparent Sensor PCBTo SA, Reflective Sensor PCB

To SA, Head Up Sensor

Front To SA, Ribbon Main PCB

To SA, Ribbon Main PCB

To Unit, Centro PCB (Option)

[SA, Ribbon PCB]

J703

J701

J702J704

J706

J705 Ribbon Motor FRibbon Motor R

To Main PCB Tension Sensor FTension Sensor R

Fan

Page 144: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 5 PARTS LISTS

5-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 145: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 5 PARTS LIST

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Recommended Spare Parts List.............................................................................................5-3 Mechanical Section

General Assembly (Drawing No. 1) ...............................................................................5-5 Unit, Base (Drawing No. 2) ...........................................................................................5-9 Unit, Mechanism (Drawing No. 3) .................................................................................5-14 Unit, Head-TT (Drawing No. 4)......................................................................................5-18 Unit, PF (Drawing No. 5) ...............................................................................................5-22 Unit, Sensor U (Drawing No. 6).....................................................................................5-26 Unit, Control Panel (Drawing No. 7) ..............................................................................5-29 Unit, Ribbon (Drawing No. 8) ........................................................................................5-32 SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan (Drawing No. 9)..........................................................................5-37 Accessories (Drawing No. 10).......................................................................................5-40

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-2

Page 146: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-3

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Recommended Spare Parts List

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/1 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 147: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-4

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Recommended Spare Parts List Sheet No. 1/1 Rev. No. 0

Maint. Class Item No. Location Part No. Part Name Q'ty/

Unit Worn Casual Remarks @

1 2-8-1 JM66707-0 SA, Main PCB 1 For CL-S621 (CSA, CSE)

2 2-8-2 JM66721-0 SA, Main PCB 1 For CL-S631 (CSA, CSE, CHINA)

3 2-8-3 JM66709-0 SA, Main PCB 1 For CL-S621C (CHINA)

4 2-8-4 JM66719-0 SA, Main PCB 1 For CL-S621 (KOREA)

5 2-8-5 JM66726-0 SA, Main PCB 1 For CL-S631 (KOREA)

6 2-33-1 JM66850-0 Unit, Power Supply (100V) 1 For CSA

7 2-33-2 JM66855-1 Unit, Power Supply (200V) 1 For CSE, CHINA, KOREA

8 3-14 JM22701-0 SA, Platen 1

9 3-18 JM66715-1 SA, Head Up Sensor PCB 1

10 4-5-1 JM14705-0 SA, Head 1 For CL-S621/S621C

11 4-5-2 JM14706-0 SA, Head 1 For CL-S631

12 5-1 JM25704-0 SA, Motor 1

13 5-14 JM66730-1 SA, Reflective Sensor PCB 1

14 6-9 JM66725-0 SA, Transparent Sensor PCB 1

15 8-5 JM66724-0 SA, Ribbon PCB 1

16 8-8 JM35703-0 SA, Ribbon Motor R 1

17 8-9 JM35702-0 SA, Ribbon Motor F 1

18 8-20 JM68705-0 SA, Tension Sensor 2

19

20

Page 148: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-5

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 1 Parts List & Location for General Assembly

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

2/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 149: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-6

DRAWING NO. 1 General Assembly (Rev. 0)

1-11-2

15-115-215-3

7-17-2

8-18-2

23-13-2

4-14-2

2

10

1112

9

5-15-2

213

14-114-2

10

Page 150: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-7

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No. 1/2

Drawing No. 1 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

1-1-1 SA, Top Cover Base JM56726-0 1 White

1-1-2 SA, Top Cover Base JM56741-0 1 Black

1-2 Screw, PHT (BH), M3.0x14 E10130-140F 7

1-3-1 Cover, Connector JM56205-0 1 White

1-3-2 Cover, Connector JM56243-0 1 Black

1-4-1 Cap, Case U JM56102-0 1 White

1-4-2 Cap, Case U JM56114-0 1 Black

1-5-1 Cover, Connector Case U JM56226-0 1 White

1-5-2 Cover, Connector Case U JM56244-0 1 Black

1-6 - - -

1-7-1 Cover, Motor JM56225-1 1 White

1-7-2 Cover, Motor JM56248-1 1 Black

1-8-1 Cover, Front JM56206-0 1 White

1-8-2 Cover, Front JM56245-0 1 Black

1-9 SA, Ribbon Holder JM34710-1 2

1-10 Screw, BH (N), M3.0x6 E00530-060WF 2

1-11 Damper, Top Cover JM59906-0 1 FRT-C2-CTZ

1-12 Nut, M3 (NI) E40130-000WF 1

1-13 Label, FCC ICES VCCI-A TZ99901-0 1 For CSA

1-14-1 Case U 621 JM56227-1 1 White

Page 151: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-8

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: General Assembly Sheet No.2/2

Drawing No. 1 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

1-14-2 Case U 621 JM56241-0 1 Black

1-15-1 Label, CL-S621 JM99958-0 1 For CL-S621 (CSA, CSE, KOREA)

1-15-2 Label, CL-S631 JM99959-0 1 For CL-S631 (CSA, CSE, CHINA, KOREA)

1-15-3 Label, CL-S621C JM99973-0 1 For CL-S621C (CHINA)

Page 152: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-9

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 2 Parts List & Location for Unit, Base

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/3 0 Oct. 5, 2010

2/3 0 Oct. 5, 2010

3/3 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 153: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-10

DRAWING NO. 2 Unit, Base (Rev. 0)

63

4-14-2

1920

23-123-223-323-4

21

22

31

7

5

17

18

24

24

16

8-18-28-38-48-5

11

10

9

15

13

14

10

2829

2829

3014

32

33-133-2

2726-126-225

1-11-2

2

12

(DRAW NO. 8)

(DRAW NO. 3)

(DRAW NO. 7)

Page 154: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-11

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Base Sheet No. 1/3

Drawing No. 2 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

2-1-1 Unit, Ribbon JM34718-0 1 White (Ref. Drawing No. 8)

2-1-2 Unit, Ribbon JM34719-0 1 Black (Ref. Drawing No. 8)

2-2 Screw, PH, M3.0x6 E00530-060WF 2

2-3 Screw, PHT (BH), M3.0x14 E10130-140F 4

2-4-1 Unit, Mechanism 621 JM49815-0 1 For CL-S621/S621C (Ref. Drawing No. 3)

2-4-2 Unit, Mechanism 631 JM49816-0 1 For CL-S631 (Ref. Drawing No. 3)

2-5 Wire Tie C6701-202# 2 8432 L=100

2-6 SA, Centro Cable JM67725-0 1

2-7 Screw, PHT (ST#3), M3.0x5 E11130-050F 4

2-8-1 SA, Main PCB JM66707-0 1 For CL-S621 (CSA, CSE)

2-8-2 SA, Main PCB JM66721-0 1 For CL-S631 (CSA, CSE, CHINA)

2-8-3 SA, Main PCB JM66709-0 1 For CL-S621C (CHINA)

2-8-4 SA, Main PCB JM66719-0 1 For CL-S621 (KOREA)

2-8-5 SA, Main PCB JM66726-0 1 For CL-S631 (KOREA)

2-9 Sheet, Main PCB JM44116-0 1

2-10 Screw, PHT (BH), M3.0x8 E10130-080F 7

2-11 Plate, Main PCB 621 JM44122-0 1

2-12 Plate, Parallel IF Cover JN54109-0 1

2-13 Screw, BHT (ST), M3.0x5 E14030-050WF 2

2-14 Washer, EXT.T, 3 (NI) E50730-000WF 3

Page 155: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-12

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Base Sheet No. 2/3

Drawing No. 2 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

2-15 Lock Screw (Inch) C6390-049# 2 HFS-4S-B1W

2-16 Plate, Earth JM54101-0 1

2-17 Sheet, Earth L JM44115-0 1

2-18 Sheet, Earth R JM44114-0 1

2-19 Cable, Ope-Pane JM67900-1 1

2-20 SA, Core JM59701-0 1

2-21 Cushion, Ope-Pane Cover JM59904-0 1

2-22 Cushion, Ope-Pane Cable JM59903-0 1

2-23-1 Unit, Control Panel JM56805-0 1 For CSA, CSE/White (Ref. Drawing No. 7)

2-23-2 Unit, Control Panel JM56808-0 1 For CSA, CSE/Black (Ref. Drawing No. 7)

2-23-3 Unit, Control Panel JM56810-0 1 For CHINA/Black (Ref. Drawing No. 7)

2-23-4 Unit, Control Panel JM56812-0 1 For KOREA/Black (Ref. Drawing No. 7)

2-24 Nut, M4 E40140-000F 2

2-25 Leg, Case L F JM59902-0 2

2-26-1 Case L JM56201-0 1 White

2-26-2 Case L JM56239-0 1 Black

2-27 Leg, Case L R JM59901-0 2

2-28 Screw, BH, M4.0x4 (NI) E00540-040WF 2

2-29 Washer, EXT.T, 4 (NI) E50740-000WF 2

2-30 Screw, BH (N), M3.0x6 E00530-060WF 1

Page 156: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-13

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Base Sheet No. 3/3

Drawing No. 2 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

2-31 Sheet 2, Main PCB JM44123-0 1

2-32 SA, Power Cable JM67745-1 1

2-33-1 Unit, Power Supply (100V) JM66850-0 1 For CSA

2-33-2 Unit, Power Supply (200V) JM66855-1 1 For CSE, CHINA, KOREA

Page 157: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-14

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 3 Parts List & Location for Unit, Mechanism

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

2/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 158: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-15

DRAWING NO. 3 Unit, Mechanism (Rev. 0)

7

5

4

6-16-2

1718

19

16

12

21-121-2

22-122-2

20

11

14

21

3

9

9

13

8 15

10

2324

3

(DRAW NO. 4)

(DRAW NO. 6)

(DRAW NO. 5)

Page 159: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-16

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Mechanism Sheet No. 1/2

Drawing No. 3 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

3-1 Screw, BH (N), M3.0x3 E00530-030WF 1

3-2 Plate, Cable Guide JM34123-0 1

3-3 Wire Tie C6701-202# 2 8432 L=100

3-4 Shaft, Head Holder JM42007-0 1

3-5 Screw, PH, M3.0x6 E00130-060F 1

3-6-1 Unit, Head-TT 621 JM19802-0 1 For CL-S621/S621C (Ref. Drawing No. 4)

3-6-2 Unit, Head-TT 631 JM19803-0 1 For CL-S631 (Ref. Drawing No. 4)

3-7 Spring, Head Up JM13601-0 1

3-8 Spring2, Head Up JM13605-0 1

3-9 Screw, BH (N), M3.0x6 E00530-060WF 2

3-10 Bracket, Motor Cover JM44118-0 1

3-11 Screw, PH (SW+PW), M4.0x16 E00940-160F 1

3-12 E-Ring, 4 E60340-000F 1

3-13 Hook, Head Up Spring 2 JM14112-0 1

3-14 SA, Platen JM22701-0 1

3-15 SA, Ribbon Cable JM67770-0 1

3-16 Unit, PF JM49814-0 1 (Ref. Drawing No. 5)

3-17 SA, Head Up Sensor Cable JM67715-1 1

3-18 SA, Head Up Sensor PCB JM66715-1 1

3-19 Screw, PH, M2.0x4 E00120-040F 4

Page 160: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-17

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Mechanism Sheet No. 2/2 Drawing No. 3 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

3-20 Unit, Sensor U JM29701-1 1 (Ref. Drawing No. 6)

3-21-1 Label 2, Caution Head AH90935-0 1 For CSA, CSE, KOREA

3-21-2 Label, Caution Head (CHINA) AM90901-0 1 For CHINA

3-22-1 Label 7, Caution Head AR99902-0 1 For CSA

3-22-2 Label 6, Caution Head AR99901-0 1 For CSE, KOREA

3-23 Label, Head Adjust JM99982-0 1

3-24 Label, Head Balance JM99981-0 1

Page 161: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-18

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 4 Parts List & Location for Unit, Head-TT

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

2/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 162: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-19

DRAWING NO. 4 Unit, Head-TT (Rev. 0)

1

17

17

16

2

183

4

5-15-2

67

8

9

10

1113

14

15

1

19

20

3

21

3

3

12

Page 163: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-20

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Head-TT Sheet No. 1/2

Drawing No. 4 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

4-1 Bushing, Head JM11201-0 2

4-2 Bracket, Head JM14101-0 1

4-3 Screw, PH, M3.0x6 E00130-060F 5 4-4 SA, Head Cable (3-Input) JM67711-1 1 4-5-1 SA, Head JM14705-0 1 For CL-S621/S621C

4-5-2 SA, Head JM14706-0 1 For CL-S631

4-6 Spring, Head L JM13603-0 1

4-7 SA, Head Holder Base JM14704-1 1

4-8 Screw, PH, M3.0x5 E11130-050F 1

4-9 Holder, Guide Sensor U JM14211-0 1

4-10 Lever, Head Balance JM14203-0 1

4-11 Spring, Head R JM13602-0 1

4-12 SA, Head Adjust JM14720-0 1

4-13 Cam, Head Balance JM19203-0 1

4-14 Pivot, Head Balance Cam JM12201-0 1

4-15 Guide, Head Cable JM14212-1 1

4-16 Plate, Head Earth JM14105-0 1

4-17 Screw, PH, M3.0x3 E00130-030F 2

4-18 Screw, PH, M3.0x8 E00130-080F 1

4-19 Guard, Head Connector JM19902-0 1 CE-016

Page 164: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-21

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Head-TT Sheet No. 2/2

Drawing No. 4 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

4-20 Screw, BH (N), M3.0x6 E00530-060WF 1

4-21 Shim, Head Adjust JM14106-0 - May be installed at the factory.

Page 165: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-22

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 5 Parts List & Location for Unit, PF

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

2/2 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 166: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-23

DRAWING NO. 5 Unit, PF (Rev. 0)

Page 167: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-24

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, PF Sheet No. 1/2 Drawing No. 5 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

5-1 SA, Motor JM25704-0 1

5-2 Screw, PH, M3.0x3 E00130-030F 2

5-3 Screw, PH, M3.0x6 E00130-060F 1

5-4 SA, Main Plate L JM44711-0 1

5-5 Gear, PF2 JM20202-0 1

5-6 Gear, PF Idle JM20203-0 1

5-7 Gear, PF1 JM20201-0 1

5-8 SA, Plate Peeler JM44709-0 1

5-9 Frame, Main JM44101-0 1

5-10 Wire Tie C6701-202# 2 8432 L=100

5-11 SA, Sensor Holder L JM24701-0 1

5-12 Spring, Friction PG JM23604-0 1

5-13 Screw, No.0, PHT (BT#1), M2.0x3 E11920-030F 1

5-14 SA, Reflective Sensor PCB JM66730-1 1

5-15 SA, Reflective Sensor Cable JM67720-1 1

5-16 Guide, Paper Set JM44202-2 1

5-17 Shaft, Sensor Guide JM42008-0 1

5-18 Spring, Head Lock JM43601-0 1

5-19 E-Ring, 2.5 E60325-000F 1

5-20 Lever, Head Lock JM44203-0 1

Page 168: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-25

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, PF Sheet No. 2/2 Drawing No. 5 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

5-21 SA, Main Plate R JM44702-0 1

5-22 Screw, No.0, PH (#1), M2.6x6 E01626-060F 1

5-23 Holder, Guide Sensor L JM44207-0 1

5-24 Label 5, Caution Head AK99925-0 1

5-25 Washer, EXT.T, 3 (NI) E50730-000WF 5

5-26 Screw, BH (N), M3.0x6 E00530-060WF 5

5-27 Plate, Friction PG JM24117-0 1

5-28 Spring, Friction SEN L JM23603-0 1

5-29 Plate, Friction SEN L JM24116-0 1

5-30 Screw, PH, M3.0x5 E11130-050F 1

Page 169: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-26

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 6 Parts List & Location for Unit, Sensor U

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/1 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 170: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-27

DRAWING NO. 6 Unit, Sensor U (Rev. 0)

Page 171: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-28

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Sensor U Sheet No. 1/1

Drawing No. 6 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

6-1 Cover, Head Wire JM44201-2 1

6-2 Spring, Sensor Frame JM23602-0 1

6-3 Screw, PH, M2.6x3 E00126-030F 2

6-4 Cap, Sensor Frame L JM24210-0 1

6-5 Washer, Plain, 2x5x03 E50120-003F 1

6-6 Screw, PHT (PT), M2.0x8 E10120-080F 1

6-7 Holder, Sensor U JM24205-3 1

6-8 Spring, Friction SEN U JM23605-0 1

6-9 SA, Transparent Sensor PCB JM66725-0 1

6-10 Screw, No.0, PHT (BT#1), M2.0x3 E11920-030F 1

6-11 SA, Transparent Sensor Cable JM67705-2 1

6-12 Cap, Sensor Cable U JM24212-0 1

6-13 Frame, Sensor Holder U JM24150-0 1

6-14 Screw, PH, M3.0x6 E00130-060F 1

6-15 Cap, Sensor Frame R JM24211-0 1

6-16 Tape, Sensor Cable U JM24105-0 1

6-17 Plate, Friction SEN U JM24118-0 1

Page 172: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-29

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 7 Parts List & Location for Unit, Control Panel

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/1 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 173: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-30

DRAWING NO. 7 Unit, Control Panel (Rev. 0)

4

3

21-11-21-31-4

5

Page 174: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-31

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Control Panel Sheet No. 1/1

Drawing No. 7 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

7-1-1 Cover, Ope-Pane JM56204-0 1 For CSA, CSE/White

7-1-2 Cover, Ope-Pane JM56242-0 1 For CSA, CSE/Black

7-1-3 Cover, Ope-Pane JM56252-0 1 For CHINA/Black

7-1-4 Cover, Ope-Pane JM56258-0 1 For KOREA/Black

7-2 Switch, Key JM56253-0 1

7-3 LED, Window JM56208-0 1

7-4 SA, Ope-Pane PCB JM66720-1 1

7-5 Screw, PHT (PT), M3.0x6 E10130-060F 3

Page 175: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-32

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 8 Parts List & Location for Unit, Ribbon

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/3 0 Oct. 5, 2010

2/3 0 Oct. 5, 2010

3/3 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 176: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-33

DRAWING NO. 8 Unit, Ribbon (Rev. 0) 10

1113

16

17

21

23

221819

15

20

1418

12

2123

2425

264

56

2-12-2

1

7

9 46

42

39

3534

33

3240

45 22

44

43 40

2321

38

37

3635

34

3-13-2

1

39 17

30

19 1818

12

3216

3310

1327

28

2921

31

2022

23

41

3741

38

7

8

(DRAW NO. 9)

Page 177: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-34

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Ribbon Sheet No. 1/3

Drawing No. 8 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

8-1 Screw, PH (N), M3.0x4 E00130-040WF 8

8-2-1 SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan - 1 White (Ref. Drawing No. 9)

8-2-2 SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan - 1 Black (Ref. Drawing No. 9)

8-3-1 Cover R, Ribbon Unit JM34201-0 1 White

8-3-2 Cover R, Ribbon Unit JM34221-0 1 Black

8-4 Insulator, Ribbon Board JM34120-1 1

8-5 SA, Ribbon PCB JM66724-0 1

8-6 Screw, BH, M3.0x6 (NI) E00530-060WF 4

8-7 Screw, PH, M2.6x3 E00126-030F 4

8-8 SA, Ribbon Motor R JM35703-0 1

8-9 SA, Ribbon Motor F JM35702-0 1

8-10 Screw, PH (PW), M2.0x8 E00620-080F 2

8-11 SA, Tension Adjust Lever F JM34711-0 1

8-12 Shaft, Tension Adjust JM32011-0 2

8-13 Screw, PH, M1.7x4 E01617-040F 2

8-14 SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever F JM34713-0 1

8-15 Spring F, Ribbon Tension JM33602-1 2

8-16 Screw, No.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI) E03920-030WF 4

8-17 Cover, Ribbon Tension Adjust JM34112-0 2

8-18 Screw, No.0, TFH, M2x3 (NI) E03920-030WF 6

Page 178: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-35

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Ribbon Sheet No. 2/3

Drawing No. 8 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

8-19 Cam, Tension Base Adjust JM39201-0 2

8-20 SA, Tension Sensor JM68705-0 2

8-21 Bush 2, Ribbon Guide Roller JM31202-0 4

8-22 Screw, BH, M3.0x3 (NI) E00530-030WF 8

8-23 Screw, No.0, TFH (BH), M2x4 (NI) E15920-040WF 4

8-24 SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame F JM34702-1 1

8-25 SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft F JM34715-0 1

8-26 Sheet, Static Eliminator 621 JM29909-0 1

8-27 SA, Tension Adjust Lever R JM34712-0 1

8-28 SA, Ribbon Sub Adjust Lever R JM34714-0 1

8-29 Spring R, Ribbon Tension JM33605-0 2

8-30 SA, Ribbon Sensor Frame R JM34703-1 1

8-31 SA, Ribbon Tension Shaft R JM34716-0 1

8-32 Screw, No.0, THF, M2x3 (NI) E03920-030WF 2

8-33 Plate, Ribbon Washer JM34122-0 2 CC-0205-05B

8-34 SA, Holder R Shaft JM31701-0 2

8-35 Spring, Ribbon Return JM33601-0 2

8-36 Gear 5R, Ribbon JM30204-0 1

8-37 Gear 4, Ribbon JM30203-1 2

8-38 Gear 1, Ribbon JM30201-0 2

Page 179: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-36

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Unit, Ribbon Sheet No. 3/3

Drawing No. 8 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

8-39 Gear 3, Ribbon JM30205-0 2

8-40 E-Ring, 4 E60340-000F 2

8-41 Gear 2, Ribbon JM30202-0 2

8-42 Gear 5F, Ribbon JM30206-0 1

8-43 Screw, PHT (#2), M3.0x8 (NI) E10130-080WF 2

8-44 Catch, Ribbon Holder JM34203-0 2

8-45 Knob, Ribbon Unit JM34204-0 1

8-46 SA1, Ribbon Unit Base Plate JM34707-0 1

Page 180: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-37

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 9 Parts List & Location for SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/1 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 181: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-38

DRAWING NO. 9 SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan (Rev. 0)

1-11-2

45 6

3

7-17-2

Page 182: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-39

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: SA2, Ribbon Unit Fan Sheet No. 1/1

Drawing No. 9 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

9-1-1 Cover L, Ribbon Unit JM34202-0 1 White

9-1-2 Cover L, Ribbon Unit JM34220-0 1 Black

9-2 - - -

9-3 Screw, BHT (#2), M3X6 (NI) E10530-060WF 4

9-4 SA, Fan JM68702-0 1

9-5 Bracket, Ribbon Fan JM34116-0 2

9-6 Washer, Plain, 3x8x05 E50130-005WF 4

9-7-1 Cap. Ribbon Cover JM56115-0 1 White

9-7-2 Cap. Ribbon Cover JM56116-0 1 Black

Page 183: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-40

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 Drawing No. 10 Parts List & Location for Accessories

Revision Up List

Sheet No. Rev. No. Date

1/1 0 Oct. 5, 2010

Page 184: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-41

DRAWING NO. 10 Accessories (Rev. 0)

3

2

4

1-11-21-31-4

Page 185: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 5. Parts Lists

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 5-42

PARTS LIST for CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 TITLE: Accessories Sheet No. 1/1

Drawing No. 10 Rev. No. 0

Location Part Name Part No. Q'ty/ Unit Remarks @

10-1-1 Cord Set (UL/CSA) C6009-000# 1 For CSA

10-1-2 Cord Set (OE Straight) C6009-200# 1 For CSE, KOREA

10-1-3 Cord Set (UK) C6009-300# 1 For CSE, KOREA

10-1-4 Cord Set (CHINA) C6009-800# 1 For CHINA

10-2 Shaft, Paper JM79202-0 1

10-3 Flange, Paper Wide JM79201-0 1

10-4 Ribbon Core φ25x114 JM39902-0 1

- Cleaner, Head JM79904-0 1

- Manual, User's (CD-R) JN74924-2 1 For CSA, CSE

- Manual, User's (CD-R) JN74939-1 1 For CHINA

- Manual, User's (CD-R) JM74950-0 1 For KOREA

- Guide, Quick-Start JM74981-0 1 English version

- Guide, Quick-Start JM74953-0 1 For CHINA

- Guide, Quick-Start JM74949-0 1 For KOREA

- Label, Paper (Accessory) JN79902-0 1

- Ribbon JM39901-0 1

Page 186: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

6-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 187: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CHAPTER 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Inter Connection .................................................................................................................6-3 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 1,2/13) [CPU (1/2)] ..................................................................6-4 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 3/13) [CPU (2/2)/DAC] ............................................................6-5 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 4/13) [ROM] ............................................................................6-6 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 5/13) [RAM].............................................................................6-7 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 6/13) [Custom IC]....................................................................6-8 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 6/13) [Custom IC]....................................................................6-8 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 7/13) [Head Control]................................................................6-9 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 8/13) [PF Motor Control]..........................................................6-10 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 9/13) [Sensor/Ope-pane].........................................................6-11 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 10/13) [Power/Buzzer].............................................................6-12 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 11/13) [Unit, Ribbon] ...............................................................6-13 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 12/13) [IEEE1284]...................................................................6-14 Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 13/13) [RS-232C/USB]............................................................6-15 Circuit Diagram (Power Supply PCB (120V))......................................................................6-16 Circuit Diagram (Power Supply PCB (220V))......................................................................6-17 Circuit Diagram (Ope-pane PCB) .......................................................................................6-18 Circuit Diagram (Reflective Sensor PCB) ...........................................................................6-19 Circuit Diagram (Transparent Sensor PCB) ........................................................................6-20 Circuit Diagram (Head Up Sensor PCB) .............................................................................6-21 Circuit Diagram (Ribbon PCB)............................................................................................6-22 Circuit Diagram (Tension Sensor PCB)...............................................................................6-23

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-2

Page 188: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Inter Connection

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:1/

4A

JM66

7**-

**F

Inte

r Con

nect

ion

1 3

CD/

CARETEV

NO

C

DN

G.

C.N

1PYTRP

C

5J

61J

3J6J

11J

8J

5

9J

V5+

51J

TUP

NI CA

01J

2

4J

DN

G

51KL

CD

H

02 6212

DN

G

)V42+(D

HV

2

)V42+(D

HV

3BTSD

Hn

1

DN

G

61

TALD

Hn4

EPYTD

H)V5+(

DDV

DN

G

)V42+(D

HV

DN

G

322BTS

DHn

71 91 42

7 31

1TAD

DH

3TAD

DH

5 6381

1BTSD

Hn

9)V42+(

DHV

11

)V42+(D

HV

DN

G

)V42+(D

HV

DN

G2

MHT

DH

1M

HTD

H

01 21

)V42+(D

HV

)V42+(D

HV

22 52

8

DAEH,AS

F**-50741MJ

)TUP

NI3(ELBAC

DAEH,AS

F**-11776MJ

ROT

OM,2 AS

F**-30752MJ

ROT

OM

2

V3.3+B/_FP

65

A/_FP3 4

A_FP

B_FP

PMTT

OM

1

NO

MFER

K_DEI

V5+V3.3+

V5+

V3.3+1

SNES FE

R,ASELBA

CF**-02776

MJV5+

L R

OSNES,AS

F**-30792MJ

2

101N

C

3

DEI

BCP S

NES FER,AS

F**-03766MJ

V5+

2 43 51

4 5K_

DEIT

UOFE

R

SNES A

RT,ELBAC

F**-50976MJ V3.3+

1

DN

GN

OMA

RT2 3

103N

C

SNES

UD

HD

NG

V3.3+1

PU

DAEH,AS

ELBAC S

NESF**-51776

MJ

2 3

RIP

BCP S

NES PU

DAEH,AS

F**-51766MJ

DN

G3

V3.3+1

2S

NESU

DH

23 76

DN

G54

V42+D

NG

V42+V42+

8

DN

GD

NG

V5+1

DEIRT

P

4 51LT

CTU

C

6P

HTU

C

DN

G

0LTCT

UC

1

DN

G0PYT

RPC

V42+3

V42+

98

HTTU

C72

ELBAC

RETTU

C,ASF**-56766

MJ 106N

C

BCP

RETTU

C,ASF* *-53766

MJ

RETTU

C,TIN

UF**-10889

MJ

DN

G

5

V42+

631

1LTCT

UC

2

DN

G9

0LTCT

UC

874

V42+

DN

G

PHT

UC

HTTU

C

VR

D RT

M C

D

DN

G1

V5+

RELEEP,TIN

UF**-01989

MJ2 3

RIP

ROS

NES LEEP,ASF**-94196EJ

SNESLEEP

4

WSESUAP

21

WSPOTS

DELD

NC

1

DN

G11

WSDEEF

4 6

WSED

OM

DELR

RE

DELTRP

29

DN

G

V3.3+3

7V3.3+

018

5D

NG

4x DEL

BCP E

NAPEPO,AS

F**-02766MJ

104N

C

ENAPEP

O,ELBAC

F**-00976MJ4x

WS

5 0173

DN

G

9 21

V3.3+

DN

GWSE

DO

M

WSESUAP

DELR

RE

WSPOTS

1

DELTRP

V3.3+

DELD

NC

116

DN

G

WSDEEF

42 8

41J

DN

G

DN

G

TESERn

2

.C.

N

13

1ATA

D

3ATAD

TLUAFn

62

V5+EP

1

.C.

N

11

93

0ATAD

EBO

RTSn

2ATAD

41

EMI

RPn

1PYTEI31

DN

G

6ATAD

.C.

N

.C.

N

23

DN

G

TCLS

33

YSUB

DN

G

DN

G

4 5

12

02

82

4ATAD

43

3

TX-DFTAn

6 51

92

7 21

83

5ATAD

42D

NG

22 52

DN

G

32

7ATAD

NI-TCLSn

6303

DN

G

61

DN

G

7372

DN

G

0PYTEI

DN

G

8

53

81

DN

G

GLNK

CAn

V5+

91019 71

04421

DN

G

MD

CCV

PD

3

12

STR

.C.

N

.C.

N

11

DN

G

.C.

N

51 02

31

DXR

.C.

N

.C.

NRS

D

52

.C.

N

5

.C.

N

2 7

V5+

.C.

N.

C.N

01

.C.

N21

STC

91

.C.

N

1 3

DN

G6

329

.C.

N

.C.

N

.C.

N

DXT61

.C.

N

41

8481 22

RTD

71

.C.

N42

TSO

HRET

UPM

OC

BSU

C232SR

ELBAC

ORT

NEC,AS

F**-52776MJ

BCP

ORT

NEC,TI

NU

F**-52866MJ

F/I SCI

NO

RTNE

C,ASB

CP N

OC

F**-01766MJ

105N

C

CN502

4821EEEI

.C.

N

TU

OART

V3.3+

BCP S

NES ART,AS

F**-52766MJ

102N

C

1

.C.

N2

RTP

U R

OSNES,AS

F**-20792MJ

3

4172 82

DN

G2TA

DD

H

)V002(YLPPUS

REW

OP,TIN

UF**-55866

MJ

ELBAC

REW

OP,ASF**-54776

MJ

DN

G01

DN

G01

4S

NESLEEP

DN

G

PMETB

R117 01

NW

ODP

B_SNES

TU

ONAF

21

NOT

MVA_S

NES8 9

31J

DN

G8

V42+V42+

2V5+

1 3 76

V42+54

DN

GD

NG

DN

G

21J

A_PETS

DN

G2 3

B_PETS51 4

V3.3+

B_RI

D6

A_RI

D

7J

207J

NOBBI

R,ASELBA

C0-07776

MJ

8T

UO

NAF

A_SNES

12

0R42V

0R5V

DN

G.P

32B_S

NES

0R42V

3R3V

2

NW

ODP

A_PETS71

NOT

OMV

DN

G.S

91

DN

G.P

B_PETS51 01

DN

G.P63

4261 81

7

B_RI

D

DN

G.P

0R42V

4

51

PMET

RTM

9

A_RI

D

2202

VR

D RT

M

VR

D RT

MB

CP N

OBBIR,AS

F**-42766MJ

SA

,HE

AD

JM14

706-

**F

CL-

S63

1

CL-

S62

1

SA

,Mai

n P

CB

JM

6670

7-**

F Fo

r CL-

S62

1 (C

SA

, CS

E)

JM

6672

1-**

F Fo

r CL-

S63

1 (C

SA

, CS

E, C

HIN

A)

JM

6670

9-**

F Fo

r CL-

S62

1C (C

HIN

A)

JM

6671

9-**

F Fo

r CL-

S62

1 (K

OR

EA

) J

M66

726-

**F

For C

L-S

631

(KO

RE

A)

6-3 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 189: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 1,2/13) [CPU (1/2)]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

]1:42[A

]0:51[D

42A32A22A12A02A91A81A71A61A

51A41A31A21A11A01A9A8A7A6A5A4A3A2A1A

51D

41D

31D

21D

11D

01D

9D

8D

7D

6D

5D

4D

3D

2D

1D

0D

0R5V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

51TESERn

6,01

PTNIP

O6

PTNI

DH

6

SNES

UD

H9

PHT

UC

01

0RS

DL31

PMTT

OM

8

1QE

REC

6

0QE

REH

6

NO

MART

9N

OMFE

R9

PMT

DH

7

NO

MDAE

HV7

PMTB

R11

ODX

RDLP

6

PTNIB

U31

SER

DAEH

7

1PYTEI21

NOKL

CU

2

0PYTEI21

PTNI

NC

6

SNESLEEP

01HTT

UC

01

EPYTD

H7

EKC

DS5

VTI6

KLC

CAD

3

KLCFP

8

TAD

CAD

3

1KCAE

C6

0KCAE

H6

DRn

6,4

SAC

DSn5

SAR

DSn5

KLCS

UB6,5

E BLLn/M

QDLL

6,5,4EB

ULn/M

QD

UL6,5,4

RWn/E

Wn5

]1:42[A6,5,4

0DXT

31

SC1

MO

Rn4

0PYTRP

C01

1PYTRP

C01

SCA

Gn6

NOBS

U31

SC

MAR

DSn5

RW

OIn6

1RT

MC

D01

DR

OIn6

DLCA

D3

TESER

Gn6,31,21

GRTBI

R11

REZZUB

01

NOKL

CU

2

SC2

MO

Rn4

LTC

NAF11

B_PETS11

0RT

DL31

NW

ODP

11A_PETS

11

0RT

MC

D01

MD

U31

PD

U31

]0:51[D

6,5,4

0LTCS

NSR

91LT

CSNS

R9

47T47T

45T45T

33T33T

43T43T

221T221T

04T04T

52T52T

744

R74

4R

62T62T

97T97T

A1U

2EM/058V

A1U

2EM/058V

1CIT/01

CPT

NI/56PT

NI/56P

91

1C

OT/76PT

NI/76P

7111

CPT

NI/66PT

NI/66P

81

2CIT/02

CPT

NI/2Q

RA

MD/27

P671

12C

PTNI/2

KA

AM

D/37P

571

2C

OT/2CT/47

P471

3CIT/03

CPT

NI/3Q

RA

MD/57

P371

13C

PTNI/3

KA

AM

D/67P

271

3C

OT/3CT/77

P171

TIA

W/0M

CP

43

1M

CP

33

KA

DLH/2

MC

P23

QR

DLH/3

MC

P13

QRF

ER/4

MC

P03

GRT

DA/F

ERFL

ES/5

MC

P92

TE

SE

R82

0IN

A5

1IN

A6

2IN

A7

3IN

A8

4IN

A9

5IN

A01

6IN

A11

7IN

A21

PFE

RV

A4

MFE

RV

A31

PD

U061

MD

U161

1E

DO

M51

0E

DO

M61

LE

SLLP

651

TS

YC

B/7TC

P77

RW/

EW/5T

CP

87D

R/4TC

P97

MQ

DU

U/E

BU

U/R

WU

U/3TC

P08

MQ

DLU/

EBL

U/R

WLU/2T

CP

18M

QD

UL/E

BUL/

RW

UL/1TC

P28

MQ

DLL/E

BLL/R

WLL/0TC

P38

SA

RD

S/3D

CP

68S

AC

DS/2

DC

P78

KLC

SU

B/1D

CP

88E

KC

DS/0

DC

P19

0D

29

1D

39

2D

49

3D

59

4D

69

5D

79

6D

89

7D

99

8D

401

9D

501

01D

601

11D

701

21D

801

31D

901

41D

011

51D

111

0D

PTNI/61

D/0H

DP

211

1D

PTNI/71

D/1H

DP

311

4C

OT/2D

PTNI/81

D/2H

DP

411

3D

PTNI/91

D/3H

DP

711

4D

PTNI/02

D/4H

DP

811

5C

OT/5D

PTNI/12

D/5H

DP

911

01D

UCT/001

PTNI/6

DPT

NI/22D/6

HD

P021

01RL

CT/101PT

NI/7D

PTNI/32

D/7H

DP

121

01OT/8

DPT

NI/42D/8

HD

P221

01D

UIT/9D

PTNI/52

D/9H

DP

321

11D

UCT/011

PTNI/01

DPT

NI/62D/01

HD

P421

11RL

CT/111PT

NI/11D

PTNI/72

D/11H

DP

521

11OT/21

DPT

NI/82D/21

HD

P621

11D

UIT/31D

PTNI/92

D/31H

DP

721

0M

WP/41

DPT

NI/03D/41

HD

P031

1M

WP/51

DPT

NI/13D/51

HD

P131

0A/0L

PTNI/0L

AP

67

1A/1L

PTNI/1L

AP

57

2A

47

3A

37

4A

27

5A

96

6A

86

7A

76

8A

66

9A

56

01A

46

11A

36

21A

26

31A

16

41A

06

51A

95

61A/0

HA

P85

71A/1

HA

P75

81A/2

HA

P25

91A/3

HA

P15

02A/4

HA

P05

12A/5

HA

P94

22A/6

HA

P84

32A/7

HA

P74

42A/8

HA

P64

52A/9

HA

P54

0S

C/0S

CP

44

1S

C/1S

CP

34

RW

OI/2S

C/2S

CP

24

3S

C/3S

CP

14

4S

C/4S

CP

04

DR

OI/5S

C/5S

CP

73

6S

C/6S

CP

63

7S

C/7S

CP

53

1CT/0

COT/55

P02

1K

AA

MD/10

CPT

NI/45P

121

QR

AM

D/0CIT/00

CPT

NI/35P

220

CT/25PT

NI/25P

320

KA

AM

D/15PT

NI/15P

420

QR

AM

D/05PT

NI/05P

52

52PT

NI/1O

S/52P

54142

PTNI/1I

S/42P

64132

PTNI/1

KC

S/32P

74122

PTNI/1

DXT/22

P841

12PT

NI/1D

XR/12

P941

IM

N/02P

251

0O

S/0D

XT/31P

3510I

S/0D

XR/21

P451

11PT

NI/0K

CS/11

P551

01PT

NI/KL

CU/01

P951

X1164

X2165

1TIJ1

0TIJ2

1LE

SS

961

0LE

SS

071

27T27T

83T83T

411T411T

63T63T

211T211T

99T99T

511T511T

111T111T

07T07T

93T93T

85T85T

021T021T

86T86T

41T41T

82T82T

31T31T7T7T

18T18T

44T44T

95T95T

101T101T

66T66T

25T25T

75T75T

36T36T

48T48T

721T721T

3U

A82-3F5077UJ

N

3U

A82-3F5077UJ

N

TU

OV

4D

DV

5

RM

3

SS

V2

dC

1

13T13T

34T34T

01R

%1/k3.301

R%1/k3.3

46T46T

1C 05

HC/p51

1C 05

HC/p51

92T92T

321T321T

73T73T

6R

k226

Rk22

1AR

k221A

Rk22

1234 5

678

821T821T

03

R0

3R

301T301T

k18

Rk1

8R

56T56T

2AR

k222A

Rk22

1234 5

678

72T72T8T8T

26T26T3T3T

21T21T

3AR

k223A

Rk22

1234 5

678

711T711T

121T121T

601T601T

041

R0

41R

k17

Rk1

7R

05T05T

58T58T

24T24T

78T78T

011T011T

76T76T

16T16T

54T54T

501T501T

1X

zH

M611X

zH

M61

19T19T

2C

05H

C/p512

C05

HC/p51

81T81T

79T79T

88T88T

11R

02211

R022

51T51T

%1/k0221

R%1/k02

21R

96T96T

55T55T

05

R0

5R

901T901T

74T74T

98T98T

61T61T9T9T

31R

%1/k00131

R%1/k001

4T4T

M11

RM1

1R

001T001T

06T06T

17T17T

03T03T

53T53T

09T09T

1T1T

94T94T

421T421T

701T701T

2U

AT3901CPu

2U

AT3901CPu

1A

2F

ER

1K

3

2A

4C

N5

811T811T

37T37T

84T84T

29T29T

2T2T

401T401T

3C 61B/u1.0

3C 61B/u1.0

4AR

k224A

Rk22

1234 5

678

02T02T

611T611T

38T38T

14T14T

39T39T

71T71T

2R

k222

Rk22

801T801T

49T49T

12T12T

01T01T

32T32T

5T5T

77T77T

2X

)zH

M84(50-OX

CF2X

)zH

M84(50-OX

CF

BS

V

GC

68T68T

15T15T

311T311T

59T59T

35T35T

69T69T

911T911T

4C

61B/u740.04

C61B/u740.0

89T89T

64T64T

23T23T

87T87T

621T621T

08T08T

67T67T

28T28T

65T65T

22T22T

91T91T

201T201T

42T42T

11T11T

521T521T

57T57T

0019

R001

9R

6T6T

MA

IN P

CB

, CPU

(1/2

) (1,

2/13

) JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-4

Page 190: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 3/13) [CPU (2/2)/DAC]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

2ATAD

CRT

0ATAD

CRT

DNE

CRT

ZTSR

D

KLC

CRT

OD

D

KC

DI

DD

SM

D

1ATAD

CRT

3ATAD

CRT

5R1V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

TAD

CAD

2KL

CCA

D2

DLCA

D2

UCT

OMFP

8DELS

NSEP9

141T141T

C6 0.1u/B16C6 0.1u/B16C7 0.1u/B16C7 0.1u/B16C8 0.1u/B16C8 0.1u/B16C9 0.1u/B16C9 0.1u/B16C10 0.1u/B16C10 0.1u/B16C11 0.1u/B16C11 0.1u/B16C12 0.1u/B16C12 0.1u/B16

931T931T

1J

TLF42*

1J

TLF42*12

34

56

78

901

1121

3141

5161

7181

9102

1222

3242

831T831T

C5 0.1u/B16C5 0.1u/B16

731T731T

5AR

k7.45A

Rk7.4

1234 5

678

02R

k1*02

Rk1*

61R

k7461

Rk74

C21 0.1u/B16C21 0.1u/B16C22 0.1u/B16C22 0.1u/B16

C17 0.1u/B16C17 0.1u/B16C18 0.1u/B16C18 0.1u/B16C19 0.1u/B16C19 0.1u/B16C20 0.1u/B16C20 0.1u/B16

631T631T

C1U

2EM/058V

C1U

2EM/058V

3AT

AD

CRT

231

2AT

AD

CRT

331

1AT

AD

CRT

631

0AT

AD

CRT

731

DN

EC

RT831

KLC

CRT

931

OD

D041

ID

D141

TS

RD

241

SM

D341

KC

D441

531T531T

C16 0.1u/B16C16 0.1u/B16

51R

k7451

Rk74

32C

61B/u1.032

C61B/u1.0

041T041T

81R 01

81R 01

B1U

2EM/058V

B1U

2EM/058V

DD

VI62

DD

VI55

DD

VI48

DD

VI201

DD

VI431

DD

VI751

DD

VLLP

761

SS

VI72

SS

VI65

SS

VI58

SS

VI301

SS

VI531

SS

VI851

SS

VLLP

861

DD

VE

83

DD

VE

35

DD

VE

07

DD

VE

98

DD

VE

001

DD

VE

511

DD

VE

821

DD

VE

051

DD

VA

3

DD

VC

SO

361

SS

VE

93

SS

VE

45

SS

VE

17

SS

VE

09

SS

VE

101

SS

VE

611

SS

VE

921

SS

VE

151

SS

VA

41

SS

VC

SO

661

DD

VU

261

331T331T

71R k1

71R k1

231T231T

C13 0.1u/B16C13 0.1u/B16C14 0.1u/B16C14 0.1u/B16

C150.1u/B16C150.1u/B16

131T131T

4U

9122HB

4U

9122HB

DL8

ID

6K

C7

MT3

G5

V4

A1

B2

031T031T

431T431T

91R

k1*91

Rk1*

921T921T

241T241T MA

IN P

CB

, CPU

(2/2

) / D

AC

(3/1

3)

JM66

707-

*/JM

6672

1-*/J

M66

709-

* /J

M66

719-

*/JM

6672

6-*

6-5 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 191: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 4/13) [ROM]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

1A

]0:51[D

8A 7A 6A 5A 4A 3A

51D

5D

11D

9D

8D

4D

41D

7D

2D

3D

6D

31D

01D

21D

1D

0D

91A81A

11A

31A

12A

41A

01A

51A 9A

61A

21A

71A 2A

22A

]1:42[A

02A

EBULn/

MQ

DUL

EBLLn/M

QDLLS

Cn

12A

1A 3A 5A 7A

51A9A11A31A

71A91A

41A8A

21A

02A2A 4A 6A

81A

01A

61A

41D

21D

01D

8D

6D

4D

2D

0D

51D

9D

11D

31D

5D

1D

7D

3D

DRn

2A8A9A 6A7A 4A5A

02A

41A

21A

91A

51A

12A

01A

61A

11A

81A

31A

71A 3A

1A22A

6D

9D

01D

21D

51D

5D

4D

3D

8D

41D

7D

2D

31D

11D

1D

0D

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

]1:42[A6,5,2

SC1

MO

Rn2

DRn

6,4,2EBLLn/

MQ

DLL6,5,4,2

EBULn/

MQ

DUL

6,5,2

SC2

MO

Rn2

EBLLn/M

QDLL

6,5,4,2D

Rn6,4,2

]0:51[D

6,5,2

52C

61B/u1.0*52

C61B/u1.0*

9U

40HS7

CT*

9U

4 0HS7

CT*

24

5

1

3

A6U

E6N07B

D323W

D92M

A6U

E6N07B

D323W

D92M

1-A51

D54

0A

521

A42

2A

323

A22

4A

125

A02

6A

917

A81

8A

89

A7

01A

611

A5

21A

431

A3

41A

251

A1

61A

8471

A71

E62

G82

ETY

B74

0D

921

D13

2D

333

D53

4D

835

D04

6D

247

D44

W11

PR

21B

R51

81A

61

41D

34

31D

14

21D

93

11D

63

01D

43

9D

23

8D

03

91A

902

A01

CN

31

PW/

PP

V41

B6U

E6N07B

D323W

D92M

B6U

E6N07B

D323W

D92M

2D

NG

64

CC

V73

1D

NG

72

841T841T

B7U

000IFT07H460LJ92S*

B7U

000IFT07H460LJ92S*

1C

CV

41

2D

NG

642

CC

V73

1D

NG

72

5U

40HS7

CT

5U

40HS7

CT

24

5

1

3

541T541T

0*32

R0*

32R

8U

23H

S7CT*

8U

23H

S7CT*

82C

61B/u1.0*82

C61B/u1.0*

941T941T

641T641T

0*12

R0*

12R

341T341T

52R

k1*52

Rk1*

42C

61B/u1.042

C61B/u1.0

62C

61B/u1.062

C61B/u1.0

022

R0

22R

A7U

000IFT07H460LJ92S*

A7U

000IFT07H460LJ92S*

51D

54

0 A

521

A42

2 A

323

A22

4 A

125

A02

6 A

917

A81

8 A

89

A7

01A

611

A5

21A

431

A3

41A

251

A1

61A

8471

A71

EC

62

EO

82ET

YB

74

0 D

921

D13

2 D

333

D53

4 D

835

D04

6 D

247

D44

EW

11T

ES

ER

21Y

B/Y

R51

81A

61

41D

34

31D

14

21D

93

11D

63

01D

43

9 D

23

8 D

03

91A

902

A01

12A

31

2J

)S(FT-1-G-SS

DMJ-

R05*

2J

)S(FT-1-G-SS

DMJ-

R05*

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0198 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 02 12 22 32 42 52

62 72 82 92 03 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 04 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94 05

042

R0

42R

441T441T

741T741T

72C

61B/u1.072

C61B/u1.0

MA

IN P

CB

, RO

M (4

/13)

JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-6

Page 192: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

6-7 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 5/13) [RAM]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

M

AR

DS tib

M821 ro tibM46

21A11A01A 9A 8A 7A 6A 5A 4A

]1:42[A

3A 2A

]0:51[D

32A22A

42A1A

12A0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D

6D

7D

8D

9D

01D

11D

21D

31D

41D

51D

5D

3R3V

3R3V

SC

MAR

DSn2

RWn/E

Wn2

KLCS

UB6,2

]1:42[A6,4,2

SAR

DSn2

EKC

DS2

SAC

DSn2

EBULn/

MQ

DUL

6,4,2EBLLn/

MQ

DLL6,4,2

]0:51[D

6,4,2

0 51T051T

C35 0.1u/B16C35 0.1u/B16

C33 0.1u/B16C33 0.1u/B16

151T151T

C34 0.1u/B16C34 0.1u/B16

0*62

R0*

62R

072

R0

72R

C31 0.1u/B16C31 0.1u/B16

0*82

R0*

82R

B01U

E026182V75YH

B01U

E026182V75YH

QD

DV

9

QS

SV

25

DD

V1

DD

V41

DD

V72

QD

DV

3

QD

DV

34

QS

SV

6

QS

SV

21

QS

SV

64

SS

V82

SS

V14

QD

DV

94

SS

V45

0*92

R0*

92R

C32 0.1u/B16C32 0.1u/B16

003

R0

03R

A01U

E026182V75YH

A01U

E026182V75YH

0Q

D2

1Q

D4

2Q

D5

3Q

D7

4Q

D8

5Q

D01

6Q

D11

7Q

D31

8Q

D24

0A

321

A42

2A

523

A62

4A

925

A03

6A

137

A23

8A

339

A43

01A

2211

A53

9Q

D44

01Q

D54

11Q

D74

21Q

D84

31Q

D05

41Q

D15

51Q

D35

KLC

83E

KC

73

SA

C71

SA

R81

MQ

DL51

MQ

DU

93E

W61

SC

91

0A

B02

1A

B12

)21A(

CN

63

CN

04

C29 0.1u/B16C29 0.1u/B16

0*13

R0*

13R

C30 0.1u/B16C30 0.1u/B16

MA

IN P

CB

, RA

M (5

/13)

JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

Page 193: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 6/13) [Custom IC]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

4D

H3

DH

2D

H1

DH

]1:4[D

H

7ATAD

6ATAD

5ATAD

4ATAD

3ATAD

2ATAD

1ATAD

0ATAD

]0:7[ATAD

3D

4D

0D

1D

2D

6D

5D

8D

7D

11D

01D

9D

31D

21D

41D

51D

]0:51[D

1A

61A

71A 2A3A4A

81A]1:42[A

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

KLCS

UB5,2

0LTCS

NST9

1LTCS

NST9

PTNI

DH

20

QERE

H2

0KCAE

H2

TALD

Hn7

BTSD

Hn7

]1:4[D

H7

KLC

DH

7N

OVD

H7

NOV

CH

7

PTNIP

O2

DELR

RE9

DELD

NC

9DELT

RP9

PTNI

NC

21

QERE

C2

1KCAE

C2

NI-TCLSn

21E

MIRPn

21TX-

DFTAn21

EBO

RTSn21

HLP21

TLU

AFn21

TCLS

21]0:7[ATA

D21

EP21

YSUB

21GL

NKCAn

21RI

DBO

21

ODX

RDLP

2I

DXR

DLP31

TESER

Gn2,31,21

A_RI

D11

B_RI

D11

A_SNES

11B_S

NES11

EBLLn/M

QDLL

5,4,2E

BULn/

MQ

DUL

5,4,2

DRn

4,2S

CAGn

2R

WOIn

2D

ROIn

2VTI

2

]0:51[D

5,4,2

]1:42[A5,4,2

WSED

OM

9WSP

OTS9

WSDEEF

9WSES

UAP9

NOFP

8

51TESERn

2,01

1SMFP

82S

MFP8

RIDFP

8TS

RFP8

PEELSFP8

TESERPn

8,11,01

281T281T

771T771T

991T991T

591T591T

63C

61B/u1.063

C61B/u1.0

861T861T

181T181T

851T851T

121R

k22121

Rk22

971T971T

691T691T

451T451T

571T571T

081T081T

951T951T

21U

UF80HS7

21U

UF80HS7

071T071T

93C

61B/u1.093

C61B/u1.0

791T791T

561T561T

191T191T

233T233T

371T371T

161T161T

481T481T

261T261T

871T871T

551T551T

361T361T

04C

61B/u1.004

C61B/u1.0

461T461T

981T981T

891T891T

761T761T

681T681T

021R

k22021

Rk22

73C

61B/u1.0

73C

61B/u1.0

471T471T

23R

k2223

Rk22

781T781T

133T133T

881T881T

291T291T

11U

A-BE3-561-J

G64956DPu_A

G_U

11U

A-BE3-561-J

G64956DPu_A

G_U

Xin2

Xout3

DN

G4

DD

V5

TU

OD

XR

6

PTNI

PO

7

PTNI

NC

8

PTNI

DH

9

1Q

ER

NC

01

1K

CA

NC

11

0K

CA

DH

31

KLCF

P41

DN

G51

VTI61

DR

OI71

RW

OI81

SC

91

EBLL

22

EB

UL32

DR

02

KC

S12

EB

ORT

S85

HLP

95

DN

G06

DD

V16

TLU

AF26

TC

ELE

S36

7AT

AD

46

5AT

AD

66

4AT

AD

76

3AT

AD

86

2AT

AD

96

1AT

AD

07

0AT

AD

17

RWL

42

81A

72

71A

82

BET

92

DD

V03

DN

G13

61A

23

2A

533

A43

1A

63

51D

73

41D

83

31D

93

01D

24

9D

34

8D

44

DN

G54

7D

64

6D

74

5D

84

4D

94

1D

25

0D

35

NID

XR

45

NITC

ELE

S55

TINI

65

3D

PO

08D

RP

O87

EP

O97

RIDT

O67

3M

P89

1M

P69

DD

V09

1W

S98

2W

S88

3W

S78

6W

S48

0D

PO

381

DP

O28

1D

EL49

0M

P59

3D

EL29

2D

EL39

DN

G19

2D

PO

18

1TN

CFP

99

21D

04

3D

05

2D

15

DFOT

UA

75

SR

PO

77

6AT

AD

56

DN

G57

5W

S58

2M

P79

DD

V1

RW

H52

11D

14

TE

SE

R62

4A

33

0Q

ER

DH

21

4W

S68

2TN

CFP

001

DN

EP

27

YS

UB

37

BX

MFP

101

AX

MFP

201

BMF

P301

AMF

P401

NOF

P501

DN

G601

HTLD

H701

BTS

DH

801

4AT

AD

H901

3AT

AD

H011

2AT

AD

H111

CM

S211

1AT

AD

H311

LE

SKL

C411

KLC

DH

511

NO

VD

H611

NO

VC

H711

CM

A811

NIKL

C911

DN

G021

KC

A47

651T651T

202T202T

83C

61B/u1.083

C61B/u1.0

302T302T

581T581T

102T102T

091T091T

391T391T

961T961T

061T061T

171T171T

14C

61B/u1.014

C61B/u1.0

381T381T

671T671T

402T402T

271T271T

002T002T

751T751T

661T661T

491T491T

251T251T351T351T

MA

IN P

CB

, CU

STO

M IC

(6/1

3)

JM66

707-

*/JM

6672

1-*/J

M66

709-

* /J

M66

719-

*/JM

6672

6-*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-8

Page 194: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 7/13) [Head Control]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

MA

IN P

CB

, HEA

D C

ON

TRO

L (7

/13)

JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

6-9 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 195: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 8/13) [PF Motor Control]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

MA

IN P

CB

, PF

MO

TOR

CO

NTR

OL

(8/1

3)

JM66

707-

*/JM

6672

1-*/J

M66

709-

* /J

M66

719-

*/JM

6672

6-*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-10

Page 196: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 9/13) [Sensor/Ope-pane]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

MA

IN P

CB

, SEN

SOR

/ O

PE-P

AN

E (9

/13)

JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

6-11 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 197: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 10/13) [Power/Buzzer]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

MA

IN P

CB

, PO

WER

/ B

UZZ

ER (1

0/13

) JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-12

Page 198: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 11/13) [Unit, Ribbon]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

)R

EW

OP(TI

NU

NO

BBI

R

)LA

NGI

S(TIN

U N

OB

BIR

C001=V35.2

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

0R5V

3R3V

0R42V

LTC

NAF2

GRTBI

R2

A_RI

D6

A_PETS2

B_RI

D6

B_PETS2

NW

ODP

2TESE

RPn8,6,01

PMTB

R2

A_SNES

6B_S

NES6

78C

61B/u1

78C

61B/u1

k3.3*89

Rk3.3*

89R

k199

Rk1

99R

C41U

321C

HV47

C41U

321C

HV47D

NG

8

CC

V61

082T082T

09R

%1/k00209

R%1/k002

282T282T

00169

R001

69R

C61U

GL9-R

G393CPu

C61U

GL9-R

G393CPu

+V

8

-V

4

k159

Rk1

59R

182T182T

682T682T

972T972T

49R

%1/k3.349

R%1/k3.3

21J

BT-SSRS-B21

MB

21J

BT-SSRS-B21

MB1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 11 21

582T582T

09C

61B/u1.009

C61B/u1.0

98C

05B/p000198

C05B/p0001

B61U

GL9-R

G393CPu

B61U

GL9-R

G393CPu

75 6

31J

BT-SSRS-B80

MB

31J

BT-SSRS-B80

MB1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

79R

%1/k3.379

R%1/k3.3

88C

61B/u1.088

C61B/u1.0

k00139

Rk001

39R

19C

61B/u1.019

C61B/u1.0

29R

%1/k129

R%1/k1

19R

%1/k3.319

R%1/k3.3

482T482T

22U

UF80HS7

22U

UF80HS7

872T872T

11Q

C20NL311

QC20

NL3

B41U

321C

HV47

B41U

321C

HV47A9

B01

RLC

11X

C6

XC/

XR

7Q

21Q

5

382T382T

MA

IN P

CB

, RIB

BO

N U

NIT

(11/

13)

JM66

707-

*/JM

6672

1-*/J

M66

709-

* /J

M66

719-

*/JM

6672

6-*

6-13 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 199: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 12/13) [IEEE1284]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

EP

TLUAFn 4821EEEI

EMI

RPn

NI-TCLSn

6ATAD

5ATAD

7ATAD

TX-DFTAn

4ATAD

GLN

KCAn

YSUB

0ATAD

1ATAD

TCLS

2ATAD

EBO

RTSn

3ATAD

TESERn

4821E

EEI

NAL

C.N

H L H 0

PYT

EIL

H H 1

PYT

EI

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G

DN

G.

C.N

.C.

N.

C.N

0PYTEI1PYTEI

V5+

V5+

.C.

N.

C.N

DN

G

0ATAD

1ATAD

2ATA

D3ATA

D4ATA

D5ATA

D6ATA

D7ATA

D]0:7[ATA

D

3R3V

0R5V

3R3V

0R5V

0R5V

3R3V

0R5V

TESER

Gn6,2,31

RIDB

O6

GLNK

CAn6

YSUB

6EP

6T

CLS6

TLUAFn

6

HLP6

0PYTEI2

1PYTEI

2

EBO

RTSn6

TX-DFTAn

6E

MIRPn

6NI-T

CLSn6

]0:7[ATAD

6

092T092T

203T203T

703T703T

192T192T

892T892T

992T9 92T

101R

k3.3101

Rk3.3

301R

k22301

Rk22

k1401

Rk1

401R

003T003T

303T303T

59C

61B/u0159

C61B/u01

403T403T

k1501

Rk1

501R

503T503T103T

103T

201R

k22201

Rk22

B32U

11P4821IDP

B32U

11P4821IDP

CC

V7

CC

V81

ELB

AC_

CC

V24

DN

G93

AE

O43

DN

G51

DN

G01

ELB

AC_

CC

V13

292T292T

392T392T

001001

R001

001R

782T782T

492T492T

42U

521G1T

CHA47*

42U

521G1T

CHA47*

24

5 3

1

692T692T

69C

61B/u1.069

C61B/u1.0

39C

05H

C/p51*39

C05

HC/p51*

41J

1304-C4

GX

41J

1304-C4

GX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 0211 9121 8131 7141 6151 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92 03 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93 04

882T882T

592T592T

29C

05H

C/p5129

C05

HC/p51

792T792T

A32U

11P4821IDP

A32U

11P4821IDPD

H1

9A

2

01A

3

11A

4

21A

5

31A

6

1A

8

2A

9

3A

11

4A

21

5A

31

6A

41

7A

61

8A

71

IHL

P91

41A

02

51A

12

61A

22

71A

32

OHL

H42

RID

84

9Y

74

01Y

64

11Y

54

21Y

44

31Y

34

1B

14

2B

04

3B

83

4B

73

5B

63

6B

53

7B

33

8B

23

OHL

P03

41C

92

51C

82

61C

72

71C

62

IHL

H52

982T982T

603T603T

49C

61B/u1.0*49

C61B/u1.0*

MA

IN P

CB

, IEE

E128

4 (1

2/13

) JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-14

Page 200: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Main PCB 13/13) [RS-232C/USB]

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

MA

IN P

CB

, RS-

232C

/ U

SB (1

3/13

) JM

6670

7-*/J

M66

721-

*/JM

6670

9-*

/JM

6671

9-*/J

M66

726-

*

6-15 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 201: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Power Supply PCB (120V))

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

POW

ER S

UPP

LY C

IRC

UIT

(120

V)

JM66

850-

*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-16

Page 202: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Power Supply PCB (220V))

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

N1 N2

N3

N4

POW

ER S

UPP

LY C

IRC

UIT

(220

V)

JM66

855-

*

6-17 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 203: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Ope-pane PCB)

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

AJM

6670

7-0

DELTRP

DELD

NC

DELR

RE

ED

OM

POTS

ESUAP

DEEF

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

103D

TP013103

DTP013

103T103T

103R

2102/063103

R2102/063

603R

8061/k22603

R8061/k22

703R

8061/k22703

R8061/k22

403R

2102/063403

R2102/063

103C

05/p0001103

C05/p0001

503C

05/p0001503

C05/p0001

603C

05/p0001603

C05/p0001

403C

05/p0001403

C05/p0001

303T303T

203D

TP013203

DTP013

313T313T

903T903T

303D

TD013303

DT

D013

103WS

53T-01-61-WST

103WS

53T-01-61-WST

1 23 4

5

213T213T113T113T

203C

05/p0001203

C05/p0001

803T803T

013T013T

303WS

53T-01-61-WST

303WS

53T-01-61-WST

1 23 4

5

803R

8061/k22803

R8061/k22

503T503T

403T403T

703T703T

203R

2102/063203

R2102/063

203WS

53T-01-61-WST

203WS

53T-01-61-WST

1 23 4

5

703C

05/p0001703

C05/p0001

403D

TV013403

DTV013 403

WS53T-01-61-

WST403

WS53T-01-61-

WST1 2

3 4

5

303R

2102/063303

R2102/063

603T603T

103J

A-KTB-N

MF21

103J

A-KTB-N

MF21

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 11 21

503R

8061/k22503

R8061/k22

303C

05/p0001303

C05/p0001

203T203T

PRIN

T (G

REE

N)

CO

ND

ITIO

N (O

RAN

GE)

ERR

OR

(RED

)

POW

ER (G

REE

N)

MO

DE

STO

PPA

USE

FEED

OPE

-PA

NE

CIR

CU

IT

JM66

720-

*

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-18

Page 204: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Reflective Sensor PCB)

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

A

RE

FRE

CTI

VE

SE

NS

OR

CIR

CU

IT

1/1

JM66

730-

**7-

Nov

.-200

3

CN

501

CH

P15

05-0

101

D50

2

GL1

00M

N0M

P

D50

1

GL1

00M

N0M

PTR

501

PT1

00M

C0M

P

V3R

3

1 2 3 4 5

6-19 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 205: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Transparent Sensor PCB)

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

A

TRA

NS

PAR

EN

T S

EN

SO

R C

IRC

UIT

1/1

JM66

725-

**7-

Nov

.-200

3

TR40

1P

T480

0F6

CN

401

03FM

S-1

.0S

P-T

F

V3R

3

1 2 3

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-20

Page 206: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Head Up Sensor PCB)

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:

A

HE

AD

UP

SE

NS

OR

CIR

CU

IT

1/1

JM66

715-

**7-

Nov

.-200

3

PI2

01S

G-2

78C

201

1000

pC

202

1000

p

CN

201

S3B

-PH

-K-S

1 2

3 4

1 2 3

6-21 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 207: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Ribbon PCB)

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:1/

4A

RIB

BO

N P

CB

JM66

724-

022

-Nov

.-200

4

V5+V42+V42+V42+

DN

GV3.3+

DN

GA_

RID

A_PETSB_

RID

B_PETSN

WO

DPN

OTMV

A_SNES

B_SNES

TU

ONAF

HTMB

R

DN

G

DN

GD

NG

rotom dni

weR

rotom dne

S

NAF

rosnes edis dneS

rosnes edis dniwe

R

3R3V

3R3V

TMV

3R3V

3R3V

0R5V

0R42V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

0R42V

TMV

TMV

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

3R3V

0R5V

NOT

MV

NOT

MV

A_SNES

B_SNES

TU

ONAF

HTMB

R

HTMB

R

A_SNES

B_SNES

TU

ONAF

337T337T

907T907T

61B/u1.0707

C61B/u1.0

707C

427T427T

001/p001*327

C001/p001*

327C

317T317T

027C

05F/u22.0027

C05F/u22.0

137T137T

507J

K-K-HP-B4B

507J

K-K-HP-B4B

1 2 3 4

227C

61B/u1.0227

C61B/u1.0

447T447T

127T127T

617C

05F/u22.0617

C05F/u22.0

027T027T

347T347T

107J

S-K-HP-B6B

107J

S-K-H

P-B6B

1 2 3 4 5 6

717T717T

2102/k52017

R2102/k52

017R

127C

05B/u1.0127

C05B/u1.0

117R

k22117

Rk22

537T537T

C731 *100p/100C731 *100p/100

307C

05B/u1.0307

C05B/u1.0

507C

05F/u22.0507

C05F/u22.0

61B/u1.0237

C61B/u1.0

237C

+717

C61/u01

+717

C61/u01

427C

05B/p0001427

C05B/p0001

917C

61B/u1.0917

C61B/u1.0

407J

Y-K-HP-B4B

407J

Y-K-HP-B4B

1 2 3 4

C710 *100p/100C710 *100p/100

C207U

41ZW72L

N

C207U

41ZW72L

N

CC

V5

DN

G2

207Q

ME411CT

D207

QME411

CTD

607J

E-K-HP-B2B

607J

E-K-HP-B2B

1 2

147T147T

107U

T-SES4894A

107U

T-SES4894A

RID

71

TE

SE

R01

2S

M9

ELB

AN

E2

1S

M8

PET

S41

A1TU

O12

A2TU

O22

B1TU

O81

B2TU

O1

1E

SN

ES

02

2E

SN

ES

32

1P

C4

2P

C5

PE

ELS

21

FE

R51

PC

V6

1B

BV

91

2B

BV

42

DN

G3

DN

G61

GE

RV

7C

SO

R11

DD

V31

B307U

60ZW72L

N

B307U

60ZW72L

N

34

617R

%1/k7.2617

R%1/k7.2

237T237T

017T017T

517C

61B/u1.0517

C61B/u1.0

747T747T

707T707T

527T527T

001/p001*627

C001/p001*

627C

001/p001*207

C001/p001*

207C

C307U

60ZW72L

N

C307U

60ZW72L

N

CC

V5

DN

G2

807T807T

807R

%1/k3.4807

R%1/k3.4

417T417T

207R

k001207

Rk001

337C

61B/u1.0337

C61B/u1.0

327T327T

607T607T

k1217

Rk1

217R

917T917T

C730 *100p/100C730 *100p/100

737T737T

627T627T

647T647T

537C

61B/u1.0537

C61B/u1.0

%1/k3707

R%1/k3

707R

C728 *100p/100C728 *100p/100

227T227T

61B/u1.0217

C61B/u1.0

217C

107Q

0436HP

C107

Q0436

HPC

3

14256

437T437T

247T247T

907R

%1/k4.2907

R%1/k4.2

417C

61B/u1.0417

C61B/u1.0

107C

05B/p0001107

C05B/p0001

507T507T

307J S-K-HP-B4B

307J S-K-HP-B4B

1 2 3 4

61B/u1.0727

C61B/u1.0

727C

407Q

ME411CT

D407

QME411

CTD

817T817T

937T937T

047C

05F/u22.0047

C05F/u22.0

B207U

41ZW72L

N

B207U

41ZW72L

N

34

217T217T

+607

C53/u001

+607

C53/u001

A307U

60ZW72L

N

A307U

60ZW72L

N

16

W1/%1/22.0

417R

W1/%1/22.0

417R

737C

05F/u22.0737

C05F/u22.0

927T927T

147C

05B/u1.0147

C05B/u1.0

%1/k3517

R%1/k3

517R

207T207T

C709 *100p/100C709 *100p/100

037T037T

827T827T

527C

05B/u1.0527

C05B/u1.0

k1607

Rk1

607R

W1/%1/22.0

317R

W1/%1/22.0

317R

C708 *100p/100C708 *100p/100

2102/k52817

R2102/k52

817R

407T407T

117T117T

W1/%1/22.0

407R

W1/%1/22.0

407R

507R

k22507

Rk22

001/p001*407

C001/p001*

407C

107D

V155BR

107D

V155BR

937C

61B/u1.0937

C61B/u1.0

107R

k001107

Rk001

307Q

ME411CT

D307

QME411

CTD

847T847T

437C

61B/ u1.0437

C61B/u1.0

517T517T

817C

05B/p0001817

C05B/p0001

617T617T

+837

C61/u01

+837

C61/u01

407U

T-SES4894A

407U

T-SES4894A

RID

71

TE

SE

R01

2S

M9

ELB

AN

E2

1S

M8

PET

S41

A1TU

O12

A2TU

O22

B1TU

O81

B2TU

O1

1E

SN

ES

02

2E

SN

ES

32

1P

C4

2P

C5

PE

ELS

21

FE

R51

PC

V6

1B

BV

91

2B

BV

42

DN

G3

DN

G61

GE

RV

7C

SO

R11

DD

V31

717R

%1/k5.1717

R%1/k5.1

W1/%1/22.0

307R

W1/%1/22.0

307R

C729 *100p/100C729 *100p/100

837T837T

547T547T

207J

BT-SSRS-B02

MS

207J

BT-SSRS-B02

MS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 02

107T107T

727T727T

317C

61B/u1.0317

C61B/u1.0

637T637T307T

307T

A207U

41ZW72L

N

A207U

41ZW72L

N

16

047T047T

C711 *100p/100C711 *100p/100

637C

61B/u1.0637

C61B/u1.0

Rib

bon

mot

or c

urre

nt

PD

OW

NR

ewin

d[m

A]

Sen

d[m

A]

Hig

h [1

]

Low

[0]

636

456

833

625

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 6-22

Page 208: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Chapter 6. Circuit Diagrams

Circuit Diagram (Tension Sensor PCB)

12

34

56

78

ABCD

87

65

43

21

D C B A

Title

Num

ber

Rev

isio

nSi

ze A4 Dat

e:Sh

eet

of

File

:D

raw

n B

y:1/

1A

22-N

ov.-2

004

SA

, TE

NS

ION

SE

NS

OR

PC

B

JM66

745-

**

6-23 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

Page 209: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

AP-1 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

APPENDICES

Page 210: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 AP-2

APPENDICES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

A. External Size Diagram ..................................................................................................AP-3 B. Mounting Diagrams.......................................................................................................AP-4

B-1. Main PCB .........................................................................................................AP-4 B-2. Power Supply PCB (120V) ...............................................................................AP-5 B-3. Power Supply PCB (220V) ...............................................................................AP-6 B-4. Ribbon PCB......................................................................................................AP-7 B-5. Ope-pane PCB .................................................................................................AP-7 B-6. Transparent Sensor PCB..................................................................................AP-8 B-7. Reflective Sensor PCB .....................................................................................AP-8 B-8. Head Up Sensor PCB.......................................................................................AP-8 B-9. Tension Sensor PCB ........................................................................................AP-8

Page 211: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

A. External Size Diagram

AP-3 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

A. External Size Diagram

Unit: mm (inch)

App

rox.

289

(11.

4)

Approx. 263 (10.3)

Approx.231 (9.1)

Page 212: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

B. Mounting Diagrams

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 AP-4

B. Mounting Diagrams B-1. Main PCB

Page 213: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

B. Mounting Diagrams

AP-5 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

B-2. Power Supply PCB (120V)

Page 214: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

B. Mounting Diagrams

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 AP-6

B-3. Power Supply PCB (220V)

Page 215: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

B. Mounting Diagrams

AP-7 CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631

B-4. Ribbon PCB B-5. Ope-pane PCB [Parts side] [Solder side]

POWER ONK

K

K

K

PRINT

CONDITION

ERROR

JM667

MADE IN JAPAN

MOS CAUTION

JM66

930-

01PA

US

E

FEED

STO

P

MODECN

301

12 1112

D301

D302

D303

D304

Page 216: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

B. Mounting Diagrams

CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 AP-8

12

3 4

1

3CN201

PI201

C202

C201

D502D501

TR50

1

AA

CK K

E

CN501

B-6. Transparent Sensor PCB B-7. Reflective Sensor PCB B-8. Head Up Sensor PCB B-9. Tension Sensor PCB [Parts side] [Solder side]

C

TR401 CN401

E

01

Page 217: Technical Manual CL-S621, CL-S621C & CL-S631 · Thermal Transfer Barcode & Label Printer JM74991-00F 1.00E-1011. CL-S621, ... The following two kinds of cut mode operations are available.

Recommended